Home

(NS4750-24S-4T-4X) User Manual

1. 4 18 2 PTP Status PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems This page allows the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings PTP External Clock Mode One PPS Mode Disable External Enable False VCXO Enable False w PTP Clock Configuration Auto refresh L Port List moame Device tyne _ s2 3las e 7o o 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 10 19 20 2x 22 23 24 asata7z0 No Clock Instances Present Figure 4 18 2 PTP Clock configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e One_pps_ mode Shows the current One_pps_mode configured 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put e External Enable Shows the current External clock output configuration 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO_Enable Shows the current VCXO rate adjustment configuration 387 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment e Clock Frequency Shows the current clock frequency used by the External Clock The possible range of values are 1 25000000 1 25MHz e Clock Instance Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to monitor the Clock details e Device Type Indicates the T
2. Figure 3 2 Remote Telnet Interface Main Screen of Managed Switch For more information about using the Remote Telnet interface refer to Chapter 5 Remote Telnet Interface Management 40 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the Managed Switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser 192 168 0 X Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable eee aaa aa ala a IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location the Web Management requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later 14 16 18 20 22 FAULT Ring 0c2 RO O Dci PWR NS4750 24S 4T 4X System SNMP Port Management E Link Aggregation EMANS Welcome to IFS Transmission Spanning Tree Multicast Spee NS4750 24S 4T 4X Access Control List E Authentication 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP 4 x 10G port MAC Address Table Management Switch LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection RMON Ring Logout Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch 41 3 5
3. Object e Port e Policy ID e Action e Rate Limiter ID e Port Redirect e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown e State Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit All means all ports will have one specific setting Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting Select which port frames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited All means all ports will have one specific setting Spec
4. Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 228 4 9 7 Port DSCP This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears QoS Port DSCP Configuration ah p i al E LA LF aL LA al p I Ww ya pa E Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable AAA AA A a a a a a aa a FTW M F oOo D e Se Mo Tam 0 LD PP 0 ch Figure 4 9 9 QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot 229 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress Translate m Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox means to select all ports of Managed Switch e Classify The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Classification for a port has 4 different values All means all ports will have one specific setting Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification m DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translate
5. The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module _id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes representing the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equals 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears 62 DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server 000 0 Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Relay Mode e Relay Server e Relay Information Mode e Relay Information Policy Description Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security con
6. The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server e Other Info TX Pending radiusAccClientExt Requests PendingRequests TX Timeouts radiusAccClientExt Timeouts The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description IP Address IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values E Disabled The selected server is disabled WE Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running NW Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts E Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it 312 Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRo W Time und Trip Time Buttons
7. ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server 421 PPPoE POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on
8. 38 3 2 Management Access Overview The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods Bl Remote Telnet Interface E Web browser Interface E An external SNMP based network management application The Remote Telnet and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadvantages Remote e Text based e Security can be compromised hackers need Telnet e Telnet functionality built into Windows only know the IP address XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 operating systems e Can be accesses from any location Web Browser e Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need e Compatible with all popular browsers only know the IP address and subnet mask e Can be accessed from any location e May encounter lag times on poor connections e Most visually appealing SNMP Agent e Communicates with switch functions at e Requires SNMP manager software the MIB level e Least visually appealing of all three methods e Based on open standards e Some settings require calculations e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Comparison of Management Methods 39 3 3 CLI Mode Management There are two ways for CLI mode management one is
9. 4 2 4 Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup is completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level Add New User Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name The name identifying the user e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting almost group privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 53 Buttons Add New User Click to add a new user Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or de
10. A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 159 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward A LAN 1 Port cost 200 000 A 7 Bridge ID 15
11. Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Clear Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 313 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics E Port Limit Control Access Management Access Management Statistics HTTPs SSH Port Security Status Port Security Detail DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Statistics IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard Static Table ARP Inspection ARP Inspection Static Table 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings
12. Continuity Check APS Protocol o ese wif a 9 RAS Y Figure 4 19 2 Detailed MEP configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Instance Data Object Description e MEP Instance The ID of the MEP e Domain See help on MEP create WEB e Mode See help on MEP create WEB e Direction See help on MEP create WEB e Residence Port See help on MEP create WEB e Flow Instance See help on MEP create WEB 392 e Tagged VID e This MAC Instance Configuration Object e Level e Format e ICC Domain Name e MEG ld e MEP Id e CLevel e CMEG e cMEP e CAIS e CLCK e CSSF e aBLK e alSF e Delete e Peer MEP ID See help on MEP create WEB See help on MEP create WEB Description See help on MEP create WEB This is the configuration of the two possible Maintenance Association Identifier formats ITU ICC This is defined by ITU ICC can be max 6 char MEG id can be max 7 char IEEE String This is defined by IEEE Domain Name can be max 8 char MEG id can be max 8 char This is either ITU ICC MEG ID value 1 6 or IEEE Maintenance Domain Name depending on Format See Format This is either ITU UMC MEG ID value 7 13 or IEEE Short MA Name depending on Format See Format In case of ITU ICC format this can be max 7 char If only 6 char is entered the MEG ID value 13 will become NULL This value will become the transmitted two byte CCM ME
13. The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch is special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulate
14. i Access Access w Access Al 10 Access Figure 4 6 14 Changes Port VLAN of Port 1 3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4 6 to be VLAN3 For the VLAN ports connecting to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 1 Specify Port 7 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port 2 Assign Port 7 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration Page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members 4 Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated For this example add Port 7 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port 5 Specify Port 7 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 7 configuration is shown in Figure 4 6 15 Global VLAN Configuration E Ethertype for Custom Ethertype for Custom S ports Port VLAN Configuration Port Port T Ingress Ingress Egress Allowed Forbidden VLAN Ype Filtering a ama x VLANs lt All gt J 2 3 4 5 gt gt cl CI C cl co cl am on on on co on oo Qu on i Qu on Ln 4 4 4 44 4 7 ene cron angen aged k PAN AE JE mp En 4 lt 147 Figure 4 6 15 VLAN Overlap Port Setting amp VLAN 1 The Public Area Member Assign That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port
15. ks Qos Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Scheduler Mode enable rate unit oss Q7 Figure 4 9 3 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot Object e Schedule Mode e Queue Shaper Enable e Queue Shaper Rate e Queue Shaper Unit e Queue Shaper Excess Description Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth 220 e Queue Scheduler Weight e Queue Scheduler Percent e Port Shaper Enable e Port Shaper Rate e Port Shaper Unit Buttons Save Click to save changes Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restric
16. 2 eee Vt a ld 0 Ue Pe ad da de Ml Vedio ha Port Fail Alarm 10 Port Fall Alarm 10 Figure 4 2 19 Windows File Selection Menu Popup The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Checks the Enable checkbox will enable Digital Input output function Unchecks the Enable checkbox will disable Digital input output function e Condition As Digital Input Allows user selecting to High to Low or Low to High This is means a signal received by system is from High to Low or From Low to High it will trigger an action that logs a customize message or issue the message from the switch As Digital Output Allows user selecting to High to Low or Low to High This is means that when the switch has power failed or port failed then system will issue a High or Low signal to an external device such as an alarm e Event Description Allows user setting a customize message for Digital Input function alarming e Event As Digital Input Allows user to record alarm message to System log syslog or issues out via SNMP Trap or SMTP As default SNMP Trap and SMTP are disabled please enable them first if you want to issue alarm message via them 73 As Digital Output Allows user to monitor and alarm from port fail power fail Digital Input O DI 0 and Digital Input 1 DI 1 which means if Digital Output has detected these event then Digitial Output would be triggered according to the setting of Condition e Po
17. Description 318 e Mode e Delete e VLAN ID e Start IP address e End IP address e HTTP HTTPS e SNMP e TELNET SSH Buttons Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next apply Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Interface TELNET Access Management Statistics Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets Auto refresh C Refresh Clear Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview Page Scr
18. E Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c E SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a 87 SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must cont
19. Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh En Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 4 4 SFP Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears 106 SFP Module Information Wave Length nm Distance m Temperature C Voltage V Current mA TX power dBm RX power dBm h 4 12 fa Sle Ela los E La co y era ia E Pa ho h pa pa pa pa pa Pa Ja sli SFP Moniter Event Alert LJ send trap Warning Temperature Degree C Auto refresh L Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are NW 10GBase SR NW 10GBase LR M 1000Base SX M 1000Base LX NW 100B
20. Received Router Port 1m amp to M Figure 4 8 10 IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports 194 e V3 Reports Received e V2 Leave Received e Router Port e Port e Status Buttons Retresh The number of Received V3 Reports The number of Received V2 Leave Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port Switch port number Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 195 4 8 8 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this Page
21. Section 6 CLI MODE The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to do troubleshooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch Appendix B The section contains glossary information of the Managed Switch 14 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port m 24 100 1000Base X SFP mini GBIC slots m 4 1 10GBase SR LR SFP mini GBIC slots m 4 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 combo ports m One RJ 45 Console Interface for Basic Management and Setup gt Redundant Power System E Redundant Power System 100V 240V AC Dual 36V 60V DC NH Active Redundant Power Failure Protection Backup of Catastrophic Power Failure on One Supply E Fault Tolerance and Resilience gt Digital Input Digital Output 2 Digital Input DI m 2 Digital Output DO m Integrates sensors into Auto Alarm System a Transfer Alarm to IP Network via SNMP Trap gt Hardware Design m 10 to 60 degrees C Operating Temperature for DC Power Input only NH 19 inch Rack mountable NH Relay Alarm for Port Breakdown Power Failure E 2 Thermal Fans Design gt Layer 2 Features NH Prevents packet loss with back pressure half duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control full duplex E High performance of
22. interlogix i EG Unite Technologies NS4750 24S 4T 4X User Manual P N 1702826 REV 00 01 ISS 14JUL14 Copyright Trademarks and patents Manufacturer Intended use Certification FCC compliance ACMA compliance Canada European Union directives Contact Information 2014 United Technologies Corporation Interlogix is part of UTC Building amp Industrial Systems Inc a unit of United Technologies Corporation All rights reserved The NS4750 24S 4T 4X name and logo are trademarks of United Technologies Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Interlogix 3211 Progress Drive Lincolnton NC 28092 USA Authorized EU manufacturing representative UTC Climate Controls 8 Security B V Kelvinstraat 7 6003 DH Weert Netherlands Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation for details For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www interlogix com C N4131 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radi
23. 11 13 14 15 16 if 18 13 20 21 23 25 5 el 20 Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 226 Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values NW Default Use default PCP DEI values E Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking sscreen in Figure 4 9 8 appears Gos Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Tag Remarking Mode Cassi v Figure 4 9 8 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port E Classified Use classified PCP DEI values NW Default Use default PCP DEI values E Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default e QoS class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values to PCP DEI Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped Buttons Save Click to save changes 227
24. 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table cccooncccccoccncccnccncnoncnnnnononononcnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnrnnonnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnninnnns 343 A A E 345 Adal EINK ayer Discovery ROO CO a A ao 345 AAA DAA e a dd 345 AMAS LUD P WIEDC OM UN di ed la o ri lid 349 4144 ELDP MED Nel DO viciado tai ici diia didas 357 72 Oe A RO 362 AA O POE OUAUSUCS eta accio oi racial lic 363 AVS DIAGNOSIICS tacuba 366 A A ee eee 367 Zs AG a Av Oia ca AS Pena eR cee ein VE EE nee Re ete ere Ee Cee eR ee eee 368 TOs REMO IF PNG destacada inaudita dd liada it 368 AMO AGA DIAN O e dl ee E ee 370 ATO LOOP PEOLCCUON in sd 371 AAO A SCOMMGUAT OM cuian aeae eE A A A A ies TEE sae 371 A A hoa ceeeecena san E EE AEE L E E E A A EEE 373 ATT RMON ana aaa Since us at al ia ied dt EE 375 AL RMON Alarm C onmigural O Messa e aa a 375 A TEZ RMON Ala Ie SUL S soo esha cat a ie a e eee e eea ea aa 378 4 17 32 RMON Event Configuration 2 A cba ed coc asad dade les dee 379 LAT ARMON Event Stalls ict ctiviess sas cnncteaten tae detent bea trdaduaeecns smeionaiiede pac Aitas Gone eines eave dusdandevadea intend muapsaiaenbanweretgedeacctantt 380 4 17 5 RMON History Configuration cccccecccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaees 381 ASIS IRMION Pistory Status a A IA AA 382 4 1 7 7 RMON Statistics Configuration esar A e E E E a 383 417 sO FRIIOINESIAUSTICS SAUS ibid 384 AO PTP sira A E A seesueesu
25. Buttons Add New Server Description To delete a TACACS server entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next Save The IP address or hostname of the TACACS server The TCP port to use on the TACACS server for authentication This optional setting overrides the global timeout value Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value This optional setting overrides the global key Leaving it blank will use the global key Click to add a new TACACS server An empty row is added to the table and the TACACS server can be configured as needed Up to 5 servers are supported Click to undo the addition of the new server Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 304 4 11 8 RADIUS Overview This Page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration Page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview ir address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh Ll Refresh Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to
26. Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 175 4 7 8 Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State co 0 om w ho Mon 3TP Non STP Non STP Mon S5TP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Mon STP Mon 3TP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values E AlternatePort 176 E BackupPort E RootPort E DesignatedPort e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values E Disabled E Blocking NW Learning E Forwarding E Non STP e Uptime Th
27. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 9 2 QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 3 1 e Q0 Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 219 4 9 3 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper sscreen in Figure 4 9 3 appears enable rate unit excess A The page includes the following fields Eso ks poo repo oo repo joo ks o repo joo res o repo joo
28. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
29. El Rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold 5 Falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold a RisingOrFalling Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Rising event index 1 65535 376 e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 e Falling Index Falling event index 1 65535 3 7 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 2 RMON Alarm Status This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears Port Statistics Overview Auto refresh Ll start from Control Index o with 2 entries per page Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Mo more entres Figure 4 17 2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry e
30. Flushes the selected log entries 67 Hide Hide system log according to entry page As default System Log Information shows 20 entries for one page Hide button can hide the system log entry that has been over one page Download Click this button could download system log with CSV format file ke Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID ES Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed gt gt gt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 4 2 13 Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears Detailed System Log Information 1D Message Figure 4 2 16 Detailed Log Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Download Click this button could download system log with CSV format file 68 Refresh Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID ke Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID gt Updates the system log entry to the last available entry
31. Leave a Group version 2 MN Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below 182 Non Member Leave Group Leave Grow Send Report Start Timer Query Recelved Start Timer Delaying Member Report Received ldle Member Stop Timer Timer Expred Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions IGMP Querier A router or mul
32. Switch2 Port2 MEP4 lt gt MEP5 Switch2 Port1l lt gt Switch3 Port2 MEP1 lt gt MEP6 Switch1 Port lt gt Switch3 Port 404 5 SWITCH OPERATION 5 1 Address Table The Managed Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Managed Switch 5 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Managed Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 5 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Managed Switch it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Managed Switch will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at t
33. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears IGMP Snooping Group Information Auto refresh start from VLAN and group Address with 20 entries per page Port Members a re vean 10 crows ajajja _ o more entries O OOO OO Mo more entras Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons E Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Auto refresh Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 196 4 8 9 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this Page The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Di
34. This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point Direction Ingress This is an Ingress down MEP monitoring ingress traffic on Residence Port Level Flow Instance Residence Port Egress This is an Egress up MEP monitoring egress traffic on Residence Port The port where MEP is monitoring see Direction The MEG level of this MEP The MEP is related to this flow See Domain Tagged VID Port MEP An outer C S tag depending on VLAN Port Type is added with this VID Entering 0 means no TAG added This MAC The MAC of this MEP can be used by other MEPs when unicast is selected Info only Alarm There is an active alarm on the MEP Mew MEP Click to add a new MEP entry Click to refresh the page immediately Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 391 4 19 2 Detailed MEP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current MEP Instance screen in Figure 4 19 2 appears MEP Configuration Refresh Instance Data MEP Instance ao ude DE Residence Port Flow Instance Tansee YID EPS Instance This MAC Mep Ingress 00 30 4P Eb 56 5E Instance Configuration Level Format iCC Domain Name MEG 10 MEP 10 Tasosa vid Java one owen eats eck Sor abi ats al le o Peer MEP Configuration o e woww 6 Add New Peer MEP Functional Configuration
35. and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provide directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV 426 UDP UPnP TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits
36. avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster Spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 4 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot 162 The page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object e Protocol Version e Bridge Priority e Forward Delay e Max Age e Maximum Hop Count e Transmit Hold Count Description The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Other
37. by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1 X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that 287 e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC addr
38. indefinitely a dash will be shown Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 326 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Diari Y Port Mode Configuration hl 4 x 4 4 Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot 327 DHCP Snooping Overview VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address 1 192 168 0 1 00 26 6F 12 23 2e 2 192 168 0 2 00 12 23 4e Af B2 DHCP Trust Port Un Trust Port 328 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the
39. of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP 424 SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master
40. status The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears IP Interfaces fnterface Twoe Address Status Oslo 00 00 00 00 00 00 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MULTICAST gt OS lo 127 0 0 1 8 Oslo feso 1 1 64 Oslo 21128 WLAN1 00 23 6f 11 26 2e UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST VLAN1 192 168 0 100 20 VLAN fes0 2 230 41fffe011 2233 64 IP Routes 127 0 0 1 32 UP HOST gt 192168 0 0 24 UP HW_RT gt 192168 0 0 20 lt UP HW_RT gt 224 0 0 0 4 UP 21828 lt UP HOST gt Neighbour cache 192 168 0 123 WLAN1 00 30 41 91 e6 45 fe80 2 230 4f1811 2233 WLAN1 00 30 4f 1 1 22 33 Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description The name of the interface Type The address type of the entry This may be LINK or IPv4 IP Interfaces Address The current address of the interface of the given type The status flags of the interface and or address The destination IP network or host address of this route IP Routes Gateway The gateway address of this route The status flags of the route IP Address The IP address of the entry Neighbor Cache The Link MAC address for which a binding to the IP address given Link Address exist 92 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew IPv6 Auto Configuration This button is only available if IPv6 Auto Configuration is enabled
41. then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port e VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports 134 Buttons Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status This Page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears 135 VLAN Port Status for Combined users Combined Auto refresh CI Refresh Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Port YLAN ID Untagged YLAN ID Conflicts Untag PIO Untag PWID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PWID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PID Untag PIO Untag PID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PID Untag PIO Untag PWID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PID Untag PIO Untag PWID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PWID Untag PIO Untag PIO Untag PIO Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User Page Screensho
42. 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 set up the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Steps 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PC is not able to access each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port Promiscuous Public Servers snonodsiwioid NS4750 24S 4T 4X VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Private VLAN Figure 4 6 16 The Port Isolate VLAN Diagram 148 Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears Auto refresh Ll Port Isolation Configuration Port Number ENE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 1112 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Y Y AM MODDODODODODOOOODODOOOODODODODODOLDd Figure 4 6 17 The Configuration of Isolated and Promiscuous Port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 3 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 18
43. 3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol 19 Environment Operating IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP ITU G 8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 Temperature 10 60 degrees C for DC power input 0 50 degrees C for AC power input Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 10 70 degrees C Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 20 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 Hardware Descriptions The Managed Switch provides four different running speeds 10Mbps 100Mbps 1000Mbps and 10Gbps in the same Switch and automatically distinguishes the speed of incoming connection This section describes the hardware features of Managed Switch For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch read this chapter carefully 2 1 1 Front Panel Figure 2 1 shows the front panel of M
44. 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters NW Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified E Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option E WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich E NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW E NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object Description 352 Country code State County City City district Block Neighborhood Street Leading street direction Trailing street suffix
45. 9 18 Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot 249 The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e VLAN ID e Age Time e Traffic Class e Port Mode e Port Security e Port Discovery Protocol Description Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are E Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation E Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible port modes are WN Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN WE Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members au
46. ACE Possible values are E Any The ACE will match any frame type E EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP NW IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are E Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored NW Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU 254 e Coun
47. Access VLANs column the 1 3 is including VLAN1 and 2 and 3 Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs 113 PO Ethertype for Custom S ports 8828 S Figure 4 6 9 Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 28 143 os Mm amp w M oo Figure 4 6 10 Cha Port Type lt All gt Fort Fort C Port C Port Port Qca C3 lt E E El Es o st fs 4 ANA 4 4 Global VLAN Configuration IA Port VLAN Configuration Ingress Egress Allowed Forbidden Acceptance Tagging VLANs VLANs lt A gt lla we JE Ingress Filtering Tagged and Untagged Untag Fart WLAN po Tagged and Untagged Untag Port VLAN po Tagged and Untagged Untag Port VLAN 7 SS nge Port VLAN of Port 1 3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4 6 to be VLAN3 144 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 Change Port 3 Mode as Trunk Selects Egress Tagging as Tag All and Types 2 in the Allowed VLANs column Change Port 6 Mode as Trunk and Selects Egress Tagging as Tag All and Types 3 in the Allowed VLANs column The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 11 appears Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs ne ee asss Port VLAN Configuration Port Liss Ingress Egress Allowed Forbidden com 2 A O E da y a A Access Y Y ME
48. Before connecting the other switches workstation or media converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type or WDM pair for example 100Base FX to 100Base FX 100Base BX20 U to 100Base BX20 D 2 Check the fiber optic cable type that matches the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to MFB FX SFP transceiver use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to MFB F20 F40 F60 FA20 FB20 SFP transceiver use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connecting the fiber cable 1 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a media converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot of the switch converter Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails Co works with some fiber NICs or media converters Set the Link mode to 100 Force when needed 36 2 3 2 Removing the Module 1 Make sure there is no network activity by checking with the network administrator or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position Pull o
49. Client Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers e Receive form Client The number of received packets from server e Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained e Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics 4 2 11 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as average over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears 65 Subereteski CPU Load 100ms 3 f 1sec
50. DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator 413 Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which
51. Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as shown below Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 gt 5 sec Factory Default Console eset y A AY AS A Y A A 115200 N 8 1 Figure 2 2 Reset button of Managed Switch 1 Press the RESET button once and the Managed Switch will reboot automatically 2 Press the RESET button for 5 seconds and the Managed Switch will be back to the factory default mode the entire configuration will be erased MM AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range of 100 240V AC and 50 60 Hz 22 Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptable on the front panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet and then the power will be ready The device is a power required device which means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should be active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or curre
52. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled e Disabled Disabled Disabled 2 o Pe O NEO sO Pei s O Pei r o Pemi s O Pei 10 0 Pe v 1 o o Pei 12 0 Pena 13 0 Pemi 14 0 Pent v 16 1 O Permit 7 Ol Pena y 18 0 Pena v 19 0 Penal v 20 0 wt wt wt wt gt wt wt wt wt wt Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot yt hal hal wt wt wt wt hal hl Perralt e hal hal wt wt hl hal 269 The page includes the following fields
53. Host or a Router In Host mode IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces DNS Server This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch The following modes are supported From any DHCP interfaces The first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a DHCP enabled interface will be used m No DNS server No DNS server will be used Configured Explicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation From this DHCP interface Specify from which DHCP enabled interface a provided DNS server should be preferred DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network e IP Address Delete Select this option to delete an existing IP interface VLAN The VLAN associated with the IP interface Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface This field is only available for input when creating an new interface IPv4 Enabled Enable the DHCP client by checking this box DHCP The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease Current For DHCP interfaces with an active lease this column show the Lease current interface address as provided by the DHCP server IPv4 Address Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation Mask The IPv4 network mask in number of bits prefix length Val
54. ID Print Click this button to print out system log 4 2 14 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears system Log Configuration Server Mode Mode Server Mode _ Address Syslog Level Level Figure 4 2 17 Remote Syslog Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are E Enabled Enable server mode operation WE Disabled Disable server mode operation e Server Address Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are E Info Send information warnings and errors 69 E Warning Send warnings and errors E Error Send errors Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 70 4 2 15 SMTP Configuration Configure SMTP Configur
55. IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears NW Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE E Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care NW Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears WE Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP 262 e Target IP Address e Target IP Mask e ARP SMAC Match e RARP SMAC Match e P Ethernet Length e Ethernet E IP Parameters address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings E 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC a
56. Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 378 e Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediate ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 17 3 RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 3 appears RMON Event Configuraton Derete i Desc Type community Event Last Time Figure 4 17 3 RMON event configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is
57. Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 314 Port Security Limit Control Configuration system Configuration Port Configuration E 5 E q 2 Disa 4 None Disabled Reopen 3 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 4 Disatied iv 4 None v Disabled Reopen 5 Disabled _ 4 Moe vw Disabled Reopen 6 Disabled m 4 None vw Disabled Reopen 7 Disabled 4 4 Mone vw Disabled Reopen 8 Disabled 4 4 None vw Disabled Reopen 9 Disabled wi 4 Moe vw Disabled Reopen 10 Disabled wv 4 None Disabled Reopen Reopen a None i Disabled 13 Disabled 4 4 None Disabled Reopen 16 Distt 4 Ne Disabled Peres 17 Disabled 4 4 None Disabled Reopen 18 Distt a Now Disabled Peres 19 mea a Nee gt Disabled Rae Disabled 11 Disabled Reopen Reopen a 4 ESA 24 Dem
58. Managed Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution Check per port LED on the Managed Switch Try another port on the Managed Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure the cable is the right type Turn off the power After a while turn on power again Can install MGB SX or other non wide temperature SFP module into SFP slot of Managed Switch Solution Yes it does However since the MGB SX and other non wide temperature SFP module cannot operate under 40 to 75 Degree C Please pay attention to this point and consider use INTERLOGIX wide temperature SFP module for Managed Switch 407 NW Changed IP address or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 5 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx Console Reset Vy Va AY ZA AZ Y IA AY TA AIN 115200 N 8 1 Reset 408 APPENDIX A A 1 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is n
59. Page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid 307 Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets 308 ccessAccepts radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthenticators radiusAuthClientExtU nknown Types radiusAuthClientExtP or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RAD
60. Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv3 MLDv2 The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 Leaves The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones respectively Received Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Al H i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Auto refresh 213 4 8 18 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this Page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 21 appears MVR Channels Groups Information Auto refresh L start fram WLAN and Group Address Bo with 20 entries per page HAT e van 0 oros 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 iie Ao more entres Figure 4 8 21 MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Automatic refresh occurs every 3 sec
61. SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMP Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the Managed Switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default getting and setting community strings for the Managed Switch is public Managed Switch SNMP Agent Status Enabled A PC Workstation ice ic with a ESPESA SNMP application IE A a fa a qn z IP Address Intranet 192 168 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP Management 42 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access
62. Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresse is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabl
63. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears Qos Control List Configuration OCEX Port Frame Type SMAC DMAC VID PCP DEI voce Figure 4 9 12 QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are E Any The QCE will match all frame type E Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed 235 e SMAC e DMAC e VID e PCP e DEI e Action e Modification Buttons LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames E IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are E Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed E Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed E Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed E Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs V
64. The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier means all MSTI items will have one priority setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 170 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instancel Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 30 6f 20 10 00 Configuration Revision MSTI Mapping MSTI YLANs Mapped Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot 171 The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object e Configuration Name e Configuration Revision MSTI Mapping Object e MSTI e VLANs Mapped Buttons Save Click to save changes Description The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as we
65. WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPA Radius WPS WRED WTR WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher prio
66. add a new Protection group entry 396 Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 397 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current ERPS Instance screen in Figure 4 19 4 appears ERPS Configuration 1 Auto refresh C Instance Data ERPS ID Port O SF MEP Port 1 SF MEP Port O APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Ring Type 1 1 2 1 2 Major Ring Instance Configuration Configured Guard Time WTR Time Hold Off Time Version Revertive LAN config 0 Y v VLAN Confi RPL Configuration RPL Role RPL Port Clear None None O Instance Command Command Port None v None Instance State Protection ae Son Transmit Port A Leonel Port p i WTR RPL No APS Port O Block Port 1 Block FOP State APS Un E E Status Status Ty Protected SF SF SF DNF BPRO Blocked Blocked Figure 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Instant Data Object Description e ERPS ID The ID of the Protection group e Porto See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 0 SF MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 SF MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 0 APS MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 APS MEP
67. allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New User Click to add a new group entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen 96 in Figure The page includes the following fields Buttons 4 3 6 appears Object e Delete e View Name e View Type e OID Subtree SNMPv3 View Configuration View Type OID Subtree E default view included E Add New Entry Save Reset Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are NW included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included NW excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry The OID defining the root of the subtree to a
68. and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority VLAN User Priorit
69. and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as
70. and revert to previously saved values 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears 291 The page includes the following fields iT E e is I lio oo y ia im Joo po 10 1 1 1 1 15 k ma h Ra pa pa pa pa pa pa pa pa da 1 lea len E es IRS SIS las laa Object Port Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class Port VLAN ID Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled G
71. another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity 108 Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Source Port Target Port Tx 101010 Tx 101010 Rx 111000 Rx 111000 Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears 109 Mirror Configuration Mirror Port Configuration Figure 4 4 6 Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot 110 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror on Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring e Port The logical port for the se
72. appears 334 pection Configuration ARP Ins Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration 335 Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Inspection Configuration e Port Mode Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Translate dynarnic to Static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears static ARP Inspection Table ECET Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings 336 e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Add Ne
73. appears Auto refresh L Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members a ri 7 Salado do D 1 z 3 Adel New Private VLAN Apply Figure 4 6 18 Private VLAN Port Setting 149 4 6 11 MAC based VLAN The MAC based VLAN entries can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh LJ Port Members ort tember Delete MAC Address vian 10 pillene kskee A Currently no entries present iC Currently no entries present Figure 4 6 19 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons Add new ents Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry Save Click to save changes Et Click to undo any changes made locally and reve
74. applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters M Class QoS class 0 7 or Default DP Valid Drop Precedence Level can be 0 1 or Default DSCP Valid DSCP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or Default Default means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE Buttons Save Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change 239 4 9 12 QoS Status This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears Combined Auto refresh LJ QoS Control List Status Action User QCE Frame Type Port Conflict Mo entries Figure 4 9 14 QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed mM LLC Only LLC frames are a
75. as follow m if the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m if the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs WN Cable pair termination Cable Length 366 4 15 1 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping IP Address Ping Length Ping Interval Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you have se
76. as follows E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will receive the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 E Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 142 5 While PC 3 transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will receive the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 While PC 4 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will receive the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 For this example VLAN Group 1 is set as default VLAN but only focuses on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow The example screenshot comes from the other switch but the configuration interface is the same with NS4750 24S 4T 4X Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 Type 1 3 in Allowed
77. bb 3Com phones 00 01 83 siemens AG phones Add New Entry Save Reset m m m m m E E Figure 4 9 19 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot 251 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normaly it descript which vendor telephony device The allowed string length is O to 32 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 252 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or s
78. can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to Control a wide variety of network traffic by Classifying traffic based on packet attributes Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications Applying security policy through traffic filtering Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network Manage network congestion QoS Terminology Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network s
79. circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_ id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users
80. client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the speci
81. detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e Status The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled a Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts E Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily 305 been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e Status The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled a Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running E Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting att
82. does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP MLD messages Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting indicates Inactive S indicates Source R indicates Receiver The default Role is Inactive e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Buttons Add New MVE VLAN Click to add new MVR VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 212 4 8 17 MVR Status This Page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 20 appears MVR Statistics YLAN ID IGMP MLD IGMP MLD IGMPyvi1 IGMPy MLDv1 IGMP 3 MLDv IGMPv2 MLDw1 Queries Received Queries Transmitted Joins Received Reports Received Reports Received Leaves Received Mo more entres Auto refresh L Figure 4 8 20 MVR Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Received e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Transmitted e IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1
83. does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated 286 on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped
84. e Start Time Settings e End Time Settings e Offset Settings Lists various Time Zones world wide Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down and click Save to set User can set the acronym of the time zone This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone Range Up to 16 characters This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the ending week number e Day Select the ending day e Month Select the ending month e Hours Select the ending hour e Minutes Select the ending minute Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 8 UPnP Configure UPnP on this page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simp
85. e Trap Destination Address Trap Destination Port Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name System Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w And it also allow a valid hostname A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 dot dash Spaces are not allowed the first character must be an alpha character and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure E Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Indicates the SNMP trap inf
86. emuan anaemia era net 68 MZ TA REMO DY SOO ic itl oho has pe aa raa Geel eect es eS a 69 A219 OMAP COMMOUPATION ascuas idad dll ita 71 4210 DIGAN PU OU A a O 72 ATA AAN dal A dur 75 421S Web Fimware Upgrade nec rio Ia Doa 76 A AAA O OO 17 4 220 Save SUA CON o e a a a e a O 78 d2 21 GOomiguration DONN OA a aa 79 4 2 22 80 42 239 COMMOUPATION Activates ena dd dd A AA 81 4 2 24 Configuration Delete a ees So eee ete ee ee E 82 AZ ZOWMAGS Selec ns cdas 82 4 226 FACO Deradlt oain E r EE ocuertmeseanmads oe sueeoeneseemeaceasead 84 42 2 System RED AA a 85 4 3 Simple Nelwork Management Protocol musicians A aaa 86 A SNMP OVSE W nara a a 86 4 3 2 SNMP System CONAGUA sasn e E a 87 1430 TRAF COMIGUA UON eeren lletres 88 4 3 4 SNMP System Information ssp ii a 92 130 SIMPY CONQUE ees 93 432071 SNMPVS COMMMUIINGS sir ida desTote da 93 A901 2 SINMIPVO USOS uses roll tod 94 43 09 INIVIPYS STOU S di ad 95 4I IA SNMP VIEWS e ed a a a o teat 96 AD 5s SONI VS ACCES Sica care cos nh rc aera a a ots a 98 44 POr Manage Me Laila 100 AAA PORE CONTI UA A r O O te tee 100 4A 2 OM SlallStCS OVVIE W sesgos a a a ae a raat 103 4 4 3 Detailed Port e A PAN 104 AAA OP MOM MaAlON ee NA Miner eet ae ate aio A Aas ceria NAC aia cr aad eae Sie Mea i RA eee 106 EAE AP OWL IVI OM A a Uae near ees 108 Ae LINK PO GNC O AMON ao osctieti tered cesta rience cet hie Ae ds ibi 111 ASA SO AGUA Ni li E 114 OLAS PP SON IU ON ic 116 125 9 LAGP SYSTEM Slats o A A A AAA 118 ALS
87. from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets 414 An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 Every incoming frame is classified to a Drop Precedence Level DP level which is used throughout the device for providing congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific DP level A DP level of 0 zero corresponds to Committed Green frames and a DP level of 1 corresponds to Discard Eligible Yellow frames DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching or ERPS is an effort at ITU T under G 8032 Recommendation to provide sub 50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no loops formed at the Ethernet layer Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet f
88. gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from Portl WLAN MAC address OC OC O0LOCLONLOD and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page YLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Auto refresh L Figure 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest 342 next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start addre
89. limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled The default value is Disabled Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this ACE The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 128 Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are NW Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored NW Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are E Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log NW Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are NW Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled 259 W Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 260 MAC Parameters Object e SMAC Filter e SMAC Value e DMAC Filter e DMAC Value VLAN Parameters Object e 802 1Q Tagged e VLAN ID Filter e VLAN ID Descript
90. network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designe
91. never blocked on sub rings without virtual channel Block status for Port 1 Both traffic and R APS block status R APS channel is never blocked on sub rings without virtual channel Failure of Protocol Defect FOP status If FOP is detected red LED glows else green LED glows 400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Auto refresh d i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 6 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 19 5 Ring Wizard This page allows the user to configure the ERPS by wizard screen in Figure 4 19 4 appears Ring Wizard Note Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time Configuration Owner Neighbour owitch a an Pon Switch a lt ap eps ep Gay Wer E Ga lan 52 sorteos Figure 4 19 5 Ring Wizard page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e All Switch Numbers Set all the switch numbers for the ring group The default number is 3 and maximum number is 30 e Number ID The switch where you are requesting ERPS e Port Configures the port number for the MEP e VLAN Set the ERPS VLAN 401 Buttons Click to configure ERPS kaj Click to save change
92. of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized E Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server E X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when 290 authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally
93. on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media Policy Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner Auto negotiation status i
94. or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Under size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets Over size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 64 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were from 65 to 127 octets in length 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were from 128 to 255 octets in length 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were from 256 to 511 octets in length 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were from 512 to 1023 octets in length 1024 1588 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were from 1024 to 1588 octets in length Buttons Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 6 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediate ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updat
95. path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 All means all ports will have one specific setting Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 All means all ports will have one specific setting Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized All means all ports will have one specific setting Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree a
96. port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears 329 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Port Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Rx Offer Rx Request Rx Decline Rx ACK Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Tx Discover Tx Offer Tx Request Tx Decline Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Auto refresh LJ GOO AAA eee A GOO A AO A A A A A ee Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Rxand Tx Discover e Rxand Tx Offer e Rxand Tx Request e Rxand Tx Decline e Rxand Tx ACK e Rxand Tx NAK e Rxand Tx Release e Rxand Tx Inform e Rxand Tx Lease Query e Rxand Tx Lease Unassigned Description The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Th
97. reduced Global VLAN Configuration The Global VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears Global VLAN Configuration Figure 4 6 1 Global VLAN Configuration Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Allowed Access VLANs e Ethertype for Custome S ports Description This field shows the allowed Access VLANs it only affects ports configured as Access ports Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field By default only VLAN 1 is enabled More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound The following example will create VLANs 1 10 11 12 13 200 and 300 1 10 13 200 300 Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters This field specifies the ethertype TPID specified in hexadecimal used for Custom S ports The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S Custom Port 129 Port VLAN Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears Port VLAN Configuration Ingress Egress Allowed Forbidden Acceptance Tagging WLANs YLANS Tagged and Untagged v Untag Port VLAN J gid db EN i i i A i The Page includes the following fields Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untageed T
98. report potential cabling issues Reset Button for System Reboot or Reset to Factory Default INTERLOGIX Smart Discovery Utility for Deploy Management 17 1 5 Product Specifications Hardware Specification 24 1000Base SX LX BX SFP interfaces Compatible with 100Base FX SFP Transceiver 10Gbps Fiber Ports 4 P SR LR SFP slots Copper Ports 4 10 100 1000Base T TP SFP combo 4101 100 1000Base T TP SFP combo ports Console Port 1 x RS 232 RJ45 serial port _Z a 8 N 1 Switch Processing Scheme Store and Forward and Forward Switch Throughput 64Bytes 95 2Mpps 128Gbps non blocking Address Table 16K entries automatic source address learning and ageing Share data Buffer 16Mbits Flow Control IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Back pressure for half duplex lt 5 seconds System reboot Reset Button gt 10 seconds Factory default Dimensions a e x D x H 440 x 200 x 44 5 mm 1U high Weight 2 935kg ED Power DC1 DC2 Fault Ring R O Link Act and speed per Gigabit port Power Consumption Max 57 watts 197 6BTU Power Requirement AC AC 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A Power Requirement DC 36V DC 1 6A Range 36V 60V DC 2 Digital Input DI Level 0 24 2 4V 0 1V DI DO Level 1 2 4 24V 0 1V Layer 2 Function SFP mini GBIC Slots Input Load Current 10mA max 2 Digital Output DO Open collector to 24VDC 100mA max load Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and ha
99. revert to previously saved values 4 16 2 Status This page displays the loop protection port status the ports from the Managed Switch 373 Loop Protection Status Auto refresh _ Refresh No ports enabled Figure 4 16 2 Loop Protection Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port e Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 374 4 17 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 NW Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent History Record periodical
100. sample Index oo with 20 entries per page Event i a LogIndex LogDescription Mo more entres Figure 4 17 4 RMON Event Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description 380 Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh_ Click to refresh the page immediate s Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt ES Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 17 5 RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 5 appears RMON History Configuration Buckets Delete 10 Data Source interval Buckets Buckets New Ens Figure 4 17 5 RMON history configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is swit
101. separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Port Configuration This Page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch MM IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those 127 ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used inter
102. shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if there s no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MDS5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv 6 instead of using a separate protocol In 2002 the IEEE introduced an evolution of RSTP the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The MSTP protocol provides for multiple spanning tree instances while ensuring RSTP and STP compatibility Th
103. the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object e Port Description The port number for which the configuration below applies 316 e Mode e Limit e Action e State The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port
104. the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 61 Y My Network Places CE w File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A ei ya Search Folders 332 Address My Network Places J Go A Network Tasks D a 2 Add a network place LA a View network connections a A i i i 23 Setup a wireless network for a home or small office Y Search Active Directory a Hide icons for networked UPnP devices S NS4750 24S 4T Print Server PS 038880 Print Server PS 4C268B Other Places a Desktop Entired Network ig My Computer My documents pan Printers and Faxes Details Figure 4 2 11 UPnP Devices shows on Windows My Network Places 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 Remote ID option2
105. the reset button on the machine Figure 4 2 31 Factory Default Page Screenshot Buttons Yes _Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State Page without resetting the configuration To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 84 4 2 27 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user will re access the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 32 appears Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart a ie Figure 4 2 32 System Reboot Page Screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the web main page without reboot the system 85 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed
106. times could be less than 50ms to quickly bring the network back to normal operation Cost effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch Solution for Metro Nowadays lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet which means the need of IP address increases However the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP address to each single user client The situation forces the ISP to come out with the IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 network infrastructure To fulfill the demand IFS releases the IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions It can work with the original network structure IPv4 and also support the new network structure IPv6 With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the NS4750 Managed Switch is the best choice for you to build the IPv6 FT Tx edge service and for Industries to connect with IPv6 network 11 Digital Input and Digital Output for External Alarm IFS NS4750 supports Digital Input and Digital Output on the front panel This external alarm offers technicians the ability to use Digital Input to detect and log external device status such as door intrusion detector for the alarm As Digital Output could be used to alarm if the NS4750 has port link down link up or power failure Digital Input eens coe eae TA ETA a da IS Mail System A A CTA Alarm Messa
107. to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New MLD VLAN click to add new MLD VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and reve
108. wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port b
109. 0 000090000000000 0000090000000000 0 0090090909000000 000 0000000000000090 0000909000000000 000000000000000 0000909000000000 0000090000000000 000000000090000 0000090000000000 0090000909090000 0000900900000000 000 0000909090909090 00 0 0 0000900000090000 009000000000000 0009090000090000 000000000000000 EDES Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 115 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly
110. 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average 7 Fo iyo l 50 Al 25 PA A f A li ll A 4 Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load Page Screenshot Buttons Auto refresh L Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds If your browser cannot display anything on this page please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 66 4 2 12 System Log The switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears system Log Information autoretes Clear Level The total number of entries is O for the given level start from ID ao with entries per page 1o Level Time message No system log entries Figure 4 2 15 System Log Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported E Info Information level of the system log E Warning Warning level of the system log E Error Error level of the system log E ATI All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID lear Clear
111. 10 100 1000 Base T Switch Switch RJ45 Ports 24 X 100 1000 Base X 4 X 10Gig SFP Slots SFP Slots F Alarms Data In s Reset Console Data Out Dual Redundent System LED Button Fort DC Power Inputs Indicators Support for 10Gb Ethernet 10Gb Ethernet which adopts full duplex technology instead of low speed half duplex CSMA CD protocol is a big leap in the evolution of Ethernet 10Gb Ethernet can be deployed in star or ring topologies With 10Gb Ethernet the NS4750 switch provides broad bandwidth and powerful processing capacity It is suitable for metropolitan networks and wide area networks Using the NS4750 switch users can simplify network structures and reduce cost of network construction Optimized Design for MAN Redundant Ring Fast Recovery for Surveillance or Industrial System The NS4750 supports redundant ring technology and features strong rapid self recovery capability to prevent interruptions and external intrusions It incorporates ITU G 8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching technology Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1w RSTP and redundant power supply system into customer s industrial automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime in harsh factory environments The NS4750 also protects customer s industrial network connectivity with switching recovery capability that is used for implementing fault tolerant ring and mesh network architectures If the Industrial network is interrupted accidentally the fault recovery
112. 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes for TP port and 9000 bytes for Fiber port Configure port transmit collision behavior WE Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default NW Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions 101 e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port E Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled E ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled E PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled a Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled gf When setting each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes the T Auto MDIX function will disable Note Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 102 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview ort 256670 i rh hm OOO D O o amp 23 AA A ee A A A A A A A A A AO A amp S amp S O O G E COSA A AAA DO DO O DO DO O DO OA AO O O A A e D DO DO DO DO A AAA DO DO O DO DO O DO D O D DO O DO DO O O e D DO D DO DO O A AAA
113. 2 1 X based The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states E Multi 802 1X E MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below 298 Attached MAC Address Object e Identity e MAC Address e VLAN ID e State e Last Authentication Buttons Description Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached This column holds the VLAN ID that the co
114. 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are NW pps packets per second E kbps Kbits per second All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 273 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch is special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server is RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge P
115. 4 8 14 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration start from VLAN with entries per page Add New MLD VLAN Apply Figure 4 8 14 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Delete e VLAN ID e MLD Snooping Enable e Querier Election e Compatibility e PRI Description Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save The VLAN ID of the entry Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD Snooping Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN Disable to act as a MLD Non Querier Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto PRI Priority of Interface It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the system These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic The allowed range is 0 best effort to 7 highest default interface priority value is O Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 201 e QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1
116. 475 Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object e Port e Policy ID Buttons Description The port number for which the configuration applies The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Add New Policy Click to add new policy Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 356 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Local Port No LLDP MED neighbour information found Auto refresh C Refresh Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information with no LLDP MED device detected LLDP MED Neighbour Information Device Type Capabilities Endpoint Class Ill LLDP MED Capabilities Network Policy Extended Power wa MDI PO inventor Application Type Tag VLANID Priority DSCP oicesDefinedsUintaggede 46 WDOICe SignalingeDefneds Untaggeds 032 Auto negotiation sari Sit Auto negotiation Capabilities 000BASE
117. 8 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN 289 e Port State e Restart Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switc
118. ANAC POT Status ta A RI este 119 4 5 SACP FOM SIAuSUCS na E 121 AO VLAN coda cueros 123 ADM LAN OVERVIEW tai a tianlian tl aaa ple cdo o ed 123 A e ane ieeon 124 4653 VEAN POr CONQUE ct A A AA 127 464 VLAN Membership Sta S au A A A A 133 4 0 0 WLAN FOSAG aeo e E ibid 135 4 6 6 PrNIYIE VLAN neii is 138 AO APOSTAR 139 A 0 0 VLANScuind Example ti a A IS 140 4 40 01 1WO Separate 802 TOQ VLANS dd cias 141 4 6 8 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware Switches cccooccccccoccnccnocnncnoncnnononononnnnonononnnnonancnnonaronnonanens 146 AN A are EC Pee CE et re nee ee ee te ee eee ee err 148 ALO AA IMAG based VEAN o EE muerte taneatants 150 AG AZ MAG Dased VLAN StatU S erosiones deen cnet aeiae aa bon tie osetia Sa eo 151 AO IS I OtOCOl OAS CUA ti no la eaek 151 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN Mambership oocccocncoccccccncncncoccnoncnnncnnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnonnnnnnnnnnrinnnnnnnns 153 AT Opan KCC Protocol ioiii a a E EE ai 155 A O 155 A TZ OUP System CON IGUANA ias 162 A A Ment ree ae ee ete er ere eet EP eo ari ee emery Meee Teme Mente ne ment Meee ne Oe Mere er ae 165 ATA CIS I POit COMMOUPAL AA A A A 166 AO MS TARO Si A AE AAA 170 AO VIS MiGOMIquUra ON ua loci 171 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration ii A A A A AAA A A 173 Beh OF OF O a A ged Bg sone onus devas 176 SN ON 178 AS MUI CAS dis a a ad 179 AS MISME SACA e ed e ee oe 179 4 0 2 a MOM Table sciata e Ra cnn sexicloeeaieae ae Oe E a i 184 AO AOS S E
119. Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit 310 counters Direction Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx TX TX Name Responses Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions 311 RFC4670 Name radiusAccClientExt Responses radiusAccClientExt MalformedRespons es radiusAcctClientExt BadAuthenticators radiusAccClientExt UnknownTypes radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccClientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions Description The number of RADIUS packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions
120. Action Allows user to monitor and alarm from port fail or power fail e Power Alarm Allows user to choose which power module want to be monitored e Port Alarm Allows user to choose which port want to be monitored Buttons 19 Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Managed Switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears Firmware Update Browse Figure 4 2 21 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 21 3 Click the Browse button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware 4 Select on the firmware and then click The Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully the following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware update in progress The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will restart after the update Until then do not reset or power off the device Y Completed Figure 4 2 21 Software successfully Loaded Notice Screen 76 DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch unti
121. Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediate kee Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 17 7 RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 7 appears RMON Statistics Configuration Delete Data Source Figure 4 17 7 RMON Statistics Configuration Page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 383 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 8 RMON Statistics Status This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When firs
122. Classification Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 63 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted means to select all ports of Managed Switch e QoS Class The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 232 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Translation xy we ales gt 0 BE oep OF p 1 1 F l 2 2 a O k 8 3 3 we 3 s 4 4 v O la v 5 5 a 5 6 6 Y OF ls v 7 7 v a 7 we s cst laen OF lech 9 o O g v E 54 w 56 CS7 560S 0 57 57 s C 57 we 58 5 v O 5 z 59 59 O 159 v 60 AC Wt F AO e 61 l O 6l v 62 62 y o le z 63 63 y O 63 we Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Translation Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 233 Ingress Translate Cl
123. Click to save changes Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identify the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDP MED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears 349 LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Coordinates Location Civic Addre
124. D is enabled for this queue e Min Threshold Controls the lower RED threshold If the average queue filling level is below this threshold the drop probability is zero This value is restricted to 0 100 e Max DP1 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 1 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 e Max DP2 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 2 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 e Max DP3 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 3 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 245 4 9 15 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 17 appears Queuing Counters Auto refresh L a u a a a EEREERCE LO LO oo cul el cul el Figure 4 9 17 Queuing Counters Page Screenshot 246 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Q0 Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Auto refresh al Check this box to r
125. DO O DO DO O DO D O D DO O O DO O AA D O O DO A A A O OGO A AA OA GOGO DO G O GO A O O O P D D D DO D DO GO O DO DO DO SS O SS DO GO DO GO O O O O GO O D O G Pa D O O DO O A A A AA GOGODOGO GG O O G O GO G O A ee D DO DO DO DO O D DO O DO DOD O O DO O DO D O D DO O O O O ga amp 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 20 21 fe 23 24 25 26 2f 20 Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port 103 e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are t
126. E A AS A ETE Figure 4 6 11 Check VLAN 2 and 3 Members on VLAN Membership Page Ethertype for Custom S ports for Custom S ports I 145 4 6 8 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware Switches The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears ae eee eee es eee es ee PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged A eS See ee eee PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged EE EEE EEEE E Ei 802 1Q Trunking Figure 4 6 12 VLAN Trunking Diagram VLAN 2 VLAN 3 PC 1 Untagged ss SS l l l M PC 4 Untagged A ll ll ll Y ll eee ee AAA A a See eS O de Setup steps 1 Add VLAN Group Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 Type 1 3 in Allowed Access VLANs column the 1 3 is including VLAN1 and 2 and 3 Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs 13 Ethertype for Custom S ports 848 Figure 4 6 13 Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 2 Assign VLAN Member and PVID for each port VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 146 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 48 Global VLAN Configuration O E Fort VLAN Configuration a se eres E J sc Access w 4 2 3 4 Access s 5 Access w Ai B 9 Emnertype for Custom 5 ports for Custom S ports po Bo o JE
127. EAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a succ
128. EDEA EAEE AED EDEA EA EAEE AEAEE EEEE en Ian lor on E Wa er fon fon lr er ler lla or ar ll e er or on E E AE AE AE EME NENE SE AE AE AE ESE SEE SEE e ea zlejele le elelelelelejel elelele elele JE f E AE AE AE EME NENE SNE AE AE AE ESE SEE SNE SEA a a nn ler on on Aller ler or fon lr er or ler ler or on ln ler er or ln VLANs Loop Protect Private vLANs spanning Tree VLAN Translation MAC Table Voice VLAN LLOP Maintenance MEP Mirroring MWR NTP POE PoE ping Ports Los Security system UPNP Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot 56 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details E System Contact Name Location Timezone Log NW Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard E IP Everything except ping NW Port Everything except VeriPHY E Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY NW Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels an
129. Function Max DP 1 3 is the drop probability when the average queue filling level is 100 Frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 0 are never dropped Min Threshold is the average queue filling level where the queues randomly start dropping frames The drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level n increases linearly from zero at Min Threshold average queue filling level to Max DP n at 100 average queue filling level The following illustration shows the drop probability function with associated parameters Drop Prebetdllty 100 Mar OF 3 Max DP 2 Me OP 1 Average Filing Level 244 This page allows you to configure the Random Early Detection RED settings for queue 0 to 5 RED cannot be applied to queue 6 and 7 Through different RED configuration for the queues QoS classes it is possible to obtain Weighted Random Early Detection WRED operation between queues The settings are global for all ports in the switch The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 16 appears Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration O Min Threshold Max DP 1 Max DP 2 Max DP 3 o 5 10 Figure 4 9 16 WRED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue The queue number QoS class for which the configuration below applies e Enable Controls whether RE
130. ID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP E Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue E DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column E DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons D Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE o Moves the QCE up the list o Moves the QCE down the list G Deletes the QCE D The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 236 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears QCE Configuration Port Members A A AA E ee ee a AA 1j2j3jajsjo6j7fjejojio 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Key Parameters Action Parameters Default s Default v Figure 4 9 13 QCE Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the fo
131. IICA IN li oi ones 222 4 9 4 1 Q0s Ingress Porn Tag Classical aed eaeeneatehd vadongegan ch etaoncoeeanbiee 224 AO PONS cnc loose ile cageua died yuelingseeieeden ua dc anseueditrxeuedeeatetacteeaes 225 49 6 ONL WAG TR OMANKING asise sar aa a ee a aree a bated a ea 226 4 9 6 1 Qos Egress Port Tag RemarkinG ui E a a eee ee E 227 A E E TA 229 49 0 DSCP Based loan E E E E O 231 AID TAO A a 233 ASADO DS SGP ClASSINICAOM AAA A AA AAA SN DAA 234 AO OS CON to Sua iba 235 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration cccconccncconcncccncnnnnnnnonononcnnononononnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnanarnrrnnnnnnnnnnnns 237 Me a 2a BOTERE 0 Eo A OOo er Oe Ee ee 240 4 9 13 Storm CONTO C ONMQUI AION 1d A id 242 e e o E a 244 E SS A A e aae eE e a eatanc batten 246 49 16 Voice VLAN GCOMMNGUI ANION il A A A AA AA A tied is 248 AUF VOICE VELAN QU Table toco 251 A10 ACCESS Control iso 253 4 10 1 ACCESS GOntrol Lista na oa dolida 253 4 10 2 Access Control List Configurati0N cccococnncccncnnoconnnnonononononconononcnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrannnnnnanannnnas 256 AMOS ACES OMAN o e o o ne eee 258 AOA AGE POMS CONNOULAUON sieer Meets teed a a een ih omc ean eeceensotend 269 4 10 SACL Rate Limiter Commun ato ss Aa 272 211 PRUNE NUCATON scsi ill 274 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authenticati0ON ccooocccconccconcnconcncononncnncnnoncncnncnnonannnnnrnnnnrnnonennnnoss 275 4 11 2 Authentication Config
132. IUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received Tx Tx TX Tx Dropped Access Requests Access Retransmissio ns Pending Requests Timeouts 309 acketsDropped radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout Asend to a differ
133. In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class which is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority R RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to co
134. LLDP Port Configuration gt l T a O un un EN is ef Hi E E i m E El un EN 3 iE i m 5 En pa un z 2 a je a A d ga boa gt un d El E pa un a LE a A EN a j E g E ef a a Ld a i ya e 1 LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot 14 Figure 4 346 The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object e Tx Interval e Tx Hold e Tx Delay e Tx Reinit Description The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the t
135. MP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears ISMP Snooping VLAN Configuration start from VLAN with entries per page Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping VLAN ConfigurationPage Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected e Querier Election Enable the IGMP Querier election in the VLAN Disable to act as an IGMP Non Querier e Querier Address Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election MW When the Querier address is not set system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN Mi When the IPv4 management address is not set system uses the first available IPv4 management address Otherwise system uses a pre defined value 189 e Compatibility e PRI e QRI e LLQI LMAI for IGMP e URI Buttons Retresh By default this value will be 192 0 2 1 Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 Default compatibility value is IGMP Auto PRI Priority of Interface It indicates the IGMP c
136. MPv1 NW v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c NW usm User based Security Model USM Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are WE NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy E Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy E Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 98 Buttons Add New User Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 99 4 4 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Detail SFP Information Port Mirror 4 4 1 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Displays SFP information Sets the source and target ports for mirroring This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be config
137. NUY an oana a O 185 4 64 IGMP Snooping Configuratori nning a ieee ee Ae eee 187 4 6 5 IGMP Snooping VLAN COnfQuratiOn ns siias e a a a NEOR 189 4 8 6 IGMP Group Port Group Filtering ccoocccccccnccccnccocnnoccnnnoncnconnnonnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarnnnarinenens 192 BGs TIOME SIO PIG Status aa ei a eae tet a el tel e old eel ines 194 B66 IGMP Group MO mMaAtON mse a a sees eed 196 ES O IOMP IA Mal Ossa nia capas 197 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Configuration cccooncccccoccnncnncnnnnnncnnonnncnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnn nen rnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrnnrnnrnnannnnnas 199 4 8 11 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration ccccccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeessaaeeesaageeeeseeeeesseeeeesaees 201 48 12 MLD Snooping Port Group ESA cai 203 4 6 13 MED SnOODING Slat Sic a o leia 205 AS ANILLO Group IMIOrnMatlOM zzsk eia dderusbendaxndes occas gos e A anaa E RE E 207 4 90 10 MEDYZ MO Mal AAA 208 4 3 16 MVR MultiGaset VLAN Registrat iii A A AAA S 209 A A 213 4 8 18 MVR Groups lnformation ias 214 AS MYR SFM IMT ORIG Of 8 iacisert See a ata eiteroadeacticaan a a a ane 215 AS QUAN Ol SEVICE ii E Raa D aa a eea E ERa 216 491 E CO O E a a E O 216 4A 9 2 POM POCO ri N 217 Bo POr Slap iseer a E E E eee eeoenea nase oceees 219 4 9 3 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers ccccccsececcssececceseeccesececceueeecseueeeseececseueeessueeeesseeeeesseneeeses 220 A ALP Oli CASS
138. P ID Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a lower level than the configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with an MEG ID different from configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with an MEP ID different from all Peer MEP ID configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that AIS PDU is received Fault Cause indicating that LCK PDU is received Fault Cause indicating that server layer is indicating Signal Fail The consequent action of blocking service frames in this flow is active The consequent action of indicating Trail Signal Fail to wards protection is active This box is used to mark a Peer MEP for deletion in next Save operation This value will become an expected MEP ID in a received CCM see cMEP 393 e Unicast Peer MAC e cLOC e cRDI e cPeriod e cPriority Buttons This MAC will be used when unicast is selected with this peer MEP Also this MAC is used to create HW checking of receiving CCM PDU LOC detection from this MEP Fault Cause indicating that no CCM has been received in 3 5 periods from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with Remote Defect Indication from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a period different from what is configured for this MEP from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a priority different from what is con
139. P throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Port Filtering Profile 9999909 A 9999990 Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Filtering Profile Configuration Page Screenshot 192 The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Profile Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 193 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Status This Page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears Auto refresh Dl IGMP Snooping Status Statistics LAN Querier Querier Queries Queries Y1 Reports Y Reports 3 Reports 2 Leaves ID ersion Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received
140. Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 324 Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 12 7 Port Security Detail This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to f
141. Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B C Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _3 gt A LAN 3 Figure 4 7 2 Before Applying the STA Rules 160 In this example only the default STP values are used A Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C tora Designated Bridge A LAN2 __ gt a LAN3 8 gt Figure 4 7 3 After Applying the STA Rules The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 161 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations
142. Range 231000 rle Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration Router Port Throttling i 4 G a 4 GSS 4414 oN mma e w N c j 3 4 GS i 4 4 al Si ayo 44 4 4 i Ep ha J 2 4 a LI LI LI d LI LI LI d d P LI LI d LI LI hJ Oo ion Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Snooping Enabled e Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled e IGMP SSM Range e Leave Proxy Enable e Proxy Enable e Router Port e Fast Leave e Throtting Buttons Description Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled When IGMP Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier The Switch forwards IGMP join or l
143. SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20KM 0 50 C S40 2MLC SFP Port 1G Base SX Transceiver 300M O 50 C 1 It is recommended to use INTERLOGIX SFPs on the Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it 2 Please choose the SFP transceiver which can be operated under 40 75 degrees C temperature if the switch device is working in an 0 50 degrees C temperature environment 1000Base SX LX Before connecting the other switches workstation or media converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Base LX to 1000Base LX 35 2 Check the fiber optic cable type that matches the SFP transceiver model gt Toconnect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connecting the fiber cable 1 Insert the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a media converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 100Base FX
144. See help on ERPS create WEB e Ring Type Type of Protected ring It can be either major ring or sub ring 398 Instant Configuration Object e Configuration e Guard Time e WTR Time e Hold Off Time e Version e Revertive e VLAN Config PRL Configuration Object e PRL Role e PRL Port e Clear Description Red This ERPS is only created and has not yet been configured is not active Green This ERPS is configured is active Guard timeout value to be used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R APS messages The period of the guard timer can be configured in 10 ms steps between 10 ms and 2 seconds with a default value of 500 ms The Wait To Restore timing value to be used in revertive switching The period of the WTR time can be configured by the operator in 1 minute steps between 5 and 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes The timing value to be used to make persistent check on Signal Fail before switching The range of the hold off timer is O to 10 seconds in steps of 100 ms ERPS Protocol Version v1 or v2 In Revertive mode after the conditions causing a protection switch has cleared the traffic channel is restored to the working transport entity i e blocked on the RPL In Non Revertive mode the traffic channel continues to use the RPL if it is not failed after a protection switch condition has cleared VLAN configuration of the Protection Group Click on the VLAN Conf
145. Store and Forward architecture and Runt CRC filtering eliminate erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth m Storm Control Support Broadcast Multicast Unicast Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLAN Groups Out of 4094 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q Support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN 15 MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree by VLAN BPDU Guard Supports Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco Ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 5 trunk Groups up to 8 ports per Trunk Group Up to 16Gbps Bandwidth Duplex Mode Provides Port Mirror 1 to 1 Port Mirroring to Monitor the Incoming or Outgoing Traffic on a Particular Port Loop Protection to Avoid Broadcast Loops Supports G 8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching E R P S gt Quality of Service Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit Per Port Bandwidth Control 8 Priority Queues on All Switch Ports Traffic Classification IEEE 802 1p CoS IP TOS DSCP IP Precedence IP TCP UDP Port Number Typical Network Application Strict Priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS Policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth Control on Each Port Traffi
146. Street suffix House no House no suffix Landmark Additional location info Name Zip code Building Apartment Floor Room no Place type Postal community name P O Box Additional code Emergency Call Service The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County parish gun Japan district City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City division borough city district ward chou Japan Neighborhood block Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Example Ave Platz House number Example 21 House number suffix Example A Y Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Example South Wing Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Postal zip code Example 2791 Building structure Example Low Library Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Example 4 Room number Example 450F Place type Example Office Postal community name Example Leonia Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Example 1320300003 353 Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry t
147. T half duplex mode 1000BASE x LX Sx CX full duplex mode Asymmetric and 1DOBaseTxFD 2 pair category 5 UTP Symmetnc PAUSE for full duplex inks Symmetric PAUSE for fuleduplex links full duplex mode Auto retres hi oO Retesh Figure 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor Information with LLDP MED device detected Supported Enabled The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 357 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the pr
148. The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 17 appears MLD Snooping Group Information Auto refresh Dl start from VLAN and group Address with 20 entries per page OA e vian 10 crows feela pepis Mo more entries Figure 4 8 17 MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh se Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately kx Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 207 4 8 15 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The MLD SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the us
149. W Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN 261 e Tag Priority Mm ARP Parameters ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object e ARP RARP e Request Reply e Sender IP Filter e Sender IP Address e Sender IP Mask e Target IP Filter Description Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE E Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care E ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP E RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP NW Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE E Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care NW Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set NW Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE E Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care NW Host Sender
150. When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up lf properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels 157 Bridge and the Designated Bridges The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of
151. a All le lil le lil de a ll SID OOOOO000000000000n O Bl Bl El El Bl el el El el el el el el Bl Bl Bl El gt y y y y y y y y y y y y y p y f y E E a a a E MESES TODO ad JOR ANA RAP AAAAAA AAA T Cs oy f oy LO FP oo oy La T E ory xf LI LO FP ae a Tt Te i Ae 2lelelellellelel ell el e HHHH lt lt lt 3 lt E del lla de Pl dl ll dl PA ll ee lil ll All del lil ee de E E lil lil ee dl PIO le MEE EE ENEE TE annan 1 A 1 81 2 lelelellellell el el el e HHHH 4 lt lt 5 lt lt Eo E e E e e e E e o7 a zo aN N mM t WwW to e Cm ON OY OY oY N Figure 4 7 6 STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 166 Object e Port e STP Enabled e Path Cost e Priority e operEdge state flag e Admin Edge e Auto Edge e Restricted Role e Restricted TCN Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port means to select all ports of Managed Switch Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher
152. a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Port Priority A relative priority for each port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path 158 Default Value 128 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports O Auto Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch
153. a its 25 2 TAWAN the DEP OWer a 618 iment ree oa ol ree eee eae rare 25 2 120 Wiring the Eaulty Alarm Contact aiii a a a a oot dioe 26 21 0 Wiring he Digital Input Opus tc a tee menienenceest 27 2 2 Installing The Managed SWITCH isc as 30 ZZ DES KO STAM AUIO MN sss sont cee tatees ites rect nat haces ee A a 30 Z ZZ RACK MOUNUNO cir A umn chagal exnsaen a 31 A O O 33 2 9 Installing the SFP Transcend AA 34 232 REMOVING ME MoquiS ic A EN 37 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT ccccccceeseceeecensecnseeeneeensecesecenseonsecesesenssonseoesssenssonsesesssoneses 38 A o a ecb mands a 38 3 2 Management ACCESS OVA e 39 SS CLEMOdE MAA MN dana 40 34 Web Manage Medinaceli 41 3 5 SNMP based Network Management ccccccssseseeeeeeeeccnssneeeeeeeeeceessnseeeeecoenssneeeeeeeeeoonssseeeesesseooognneeeeees 42 4 WEB CONFIGURATION couuvidariancad iii 43 AA Mala WED Page iaa 46 A2 DV SUI O cscciiuaySenadwoateewtdecaeenss 48 4 2 a yStem Into mal ita 48 PPP Ren ee cr ee eee ern er eee ee ee ree 49 A Eee a 52 4 24 sers C OMMNOURAUON A A A a A A A AAA AS 53 AS A a tb aedeawi ne mantenacmustesdanats 55 ALO NTE CS UA a 58 42 IMM COnigWra toM a a E E foacen eda oe ae gate ween seeds 59 42o A O on ee eee eee ee ee 60 A A A satenasatmcnwsateeneeenies 62 12 TODACGP Relay Statisties ni is 64 a2 E e UN Ear 0 PERE E e A o EGO ROO aisaseaae me aeecameetaen 65 AZ 12315 LOT A A iS 67 SAN A ati rene aa ero aban uehent eon uaa Anis uation
154. a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame 425 TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is Known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP
155. a rr vano a 2 3 5 5 7 9 hola 0 00 10 19 20 2 223 24 25 20 27 28 biki kikiki k kA kad ba 40 67 kad bA 67 kad 9 bd bd 1 kad ba bd ka ka Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN Admin This is reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol or Generic VLAN Registration Protocol is a protocol that facilitates control of virtual local area networks VLANs within a larger network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port
156. ackendResp onses 297 Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Selected Counters Object e Selected Counters Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name MAC Address VLAN ID Version Identity Description IEEE Name dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameSource dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameVersion Description The MAC address of the last supplicant client The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received 80
157. agged and Untageed Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untgged Tagged and Untaseed Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untaseed Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untageed Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untagged Tagged and Untageed Apply Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Intag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Intag Port VLAN Intag Pod VLAN Untag Fort VLAN Untag Fort VLAN Untag Fort VLAN Untag Fort VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Untag Port VLAN Figure 4 6 2 Port VLAN Configuration Screenshot Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Mode Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations Dynamic features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes Access ports have the following characteristics e Member of exactly one VLAN the Port VLAN Access VLAN which by default is 1 130 Trunk Hybrid e Port VLAN e Port Type e Accepts untagged and C tagged frames e Discards all frames t
158. ain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users 4 3 3 TRAP Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP trap configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears 88 SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times i The Page includes the following fields Object e Trap Config e Trap Mode e Trap Version e Trap Community LI Warm Start LJ Cold Start Link up none specific all switches LLDP none specific all switches Ll Authentication Fail LI str LIRMON Figure 4 3 2 SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot Description Indicates which trap Configuration s name for configuring The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c E SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 89
159. alue for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed w lt E O QN New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes i Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values n Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds i Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN Mambership This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 22 appears Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members Mo Group entries a Delete Group name vian 10 23159990 0 2 550071919 20 2J222 24 25 20 27 28 No Groupee O O O OO Auto refresh L Figure 4 6 22 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot 153 The page incl
160. always active in spite of this setting SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port The allowed selection is Auto Fix Fone default compatibility value is Auto Enable the fast leave on the port Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 200 4 8 11 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure
161. ample the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 417 IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IPMC s
162. an A 25 Disabil y 25 Dist v yr Disabled Disabled e Disabled e 21 ime 22 23 Disabled Reopen Nee Disabled Rore Reopen lie Disable Al HERO Faz gt Disabled Reon 27 Dist 4 Noe Disabled Fea Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object e Mode e Aging Enabled e Aging Period Port Configuration Description Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if
163. anaged Switch its NS47 50 245 474 Figure 2 1 NS4750 24S 4T 4X Switch Front Panel HM Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters Hi Gigabit SFP slots 1000Base SX LX mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable Transceiver Module supports from 550 meters Multi mode Fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode Fiber HM 10 Gigabit SFP slots 10GBase SR LR mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable Transceiver Module supports from 300 meters Multi mode Fiber up to 10 kilometers Single Mode Fiber Mi Console Port The console port is a RJ 45 port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information including IP address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ 45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 21 MM Reset button On the front panel the reset button is designed for rebooting the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power The following is the summary table of reset button functions Reset Button Press and Release Function lt 5 sec System Reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory
164. ance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions E Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree E Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information 155 E The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch a The path cost to the root from the transmitting port a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calcu
165. and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer 420 A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address P PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implements the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3
166. appears When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF but excluding 0x800 1Pv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Cancel Return to the previous page 268 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears o yn i O E O un T O a l O to aE p i aE p a i Tal p sim Fa 3 i z T a T D eL a E 1 T 5 E T sl fa ce 2 o a li E E a 1632 wt Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled
167. arate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same ne
168. are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from O to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge go The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will ES occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost
169. ase FX e Speed Display the speed of current SFP module The speed value or description is gotten from the SFP module Different vendors of SFP modules might show different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module The wavelength value is gotten from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are matched while the fiber connection is failed 107 e Distance m Display the support distance of current SFP module The distance value is gotten from the SFP module e Temperature C Display the temperature of current SFP module The temperature value is gotten from the SFP module e Voltage V Display the voltage of current SFP module The voltage value is gotten from the SFP module e Current mA Display the ampere of current SFP module The ampere value is gotten from the SFP module e TX Power dBm Display the TX power of current SFP module The TX power value is gotten from the SFP module e RX Power dBm Display the RX power of current SFP module The RX power value is gotten from the SFP module Buttons Auto refresh L Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 4 5 Port Mirror Configure port mirroring on this page This function provides to monitor network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to
170. ased Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use 416 IGMP the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP IPMC A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For ex
171. asification modes for tagged frames are configured on this page The QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears Port 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Port 1 Tagged Frames Settings ENEE ENE EN EME EN ENE EE EN ENEE ENE EN EMENEN ER WE EMEM EN ES S D i ss OS O l 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 T T Reset Cancel Figure 4 9 5 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Tag Classification Controls the classification mode for tagged frames on this port E Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames E Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames e PCP DEI to QoS The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified PCP DEI to QoS class DP level Mapping values when Tag Classification is set to Enabled Buttons Save Click to save changes 224 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 9 5 Port Scheduler This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 6 appears QoS Egress Port Schedulers SS lo los lon fom HP foo pa k k k 13 14 15 16 i7 16 19 20 21 2A 25 26 Strict Priority Str
172. assify Egress Remap DP Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 10 DSCP Classification Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation M Translate MW Classify DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values Click to enable Classification at Ingress side There is following configurable parameter for Egress side Mm Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 This Page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Classification a T tus lt 0 1 r 3 4 5 G 7 Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Classification Page Screenshot 234 The Page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 11 QoS Control List This page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined
173. ast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears O O O E t O i he O A 0 O O i sl 3 i es LL 5 un y E i de LL a i E pul o un El E i to LL a le t 2 fabled Rate Unit Enabled Rate Unit Enabled Rate uni Ab d d LI m Pi d EE O L d d L d a a y d d d d Figure 4 9 15 Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot P E ad d 242 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here NW unicast multicast E Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 243 4 9 14 WRED RED Drop Probability
174. ate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize EEE MEE ELO B E E ee ee ll dl ll ll el dl es i ma Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot 281 The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object e Mode e Reauthentication Enabled e Reauthentication Period e EAPOL Timeout e Aging Period Description Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t impl
175. ation System Configuration seconds seconds seconds seconds Port Admin State Foros Author Foros Author Foros Author Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticare Reinitialize Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize ml Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticare Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori a Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Resuthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authori Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Author Globally Disabled Reauthentic
176. ation on this page The SMTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode C Enable O MPP 1 65535 SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Name lt 64 Digits Authentication Password lt 21 Digits EemailFrom abcd lInterlogix com lt 128 Digits Interlogix lt 64 Digits abcd Interlogix com lt 128 Digits E mail 2 To abcd Interlogix com lt 128 Digits Figure 4 2 18 SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e SMTP Mode e SMTP Server e SMTP Port e SMTP Authentication e Authentication User Name Description Enabled It is for you to enable SMTP mode function This mode offers you to configure SMTP server and SMTP account information system will refer it to send an E mail for alarm noticing It is for you to set up a specify SMTP server DNS name or IP address If it is inputted a DNS name please remember to input DNS server IP address at IP configuration page It is for you to input the SMTP server port number As default is 25 Enabled As usual SMTP server is denied to relay a mail from a different domain so you have to enable this option and input your mail account and password for SMTP sever authorizing to forward a mail from different domain For example you want a SMTP server which located on mail 123 com send a mail to mail 456 net com If you want to send the mail to a SMTP server wh
177. automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address Ping Size Ping Button k S o o aS o n amp WwW M Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot 369 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result Buttons Click to start ping process Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values ear Clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until V
178. ber Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Source MAC Address e Destination MAC Address e IP Address e TCP UDP Port Number Description The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled 114 Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members a S crow w a 2 3 4 5 6 7 s o ieee Normal 2 00000000000000 000000000000000 0000900000090000 000000000000000 0000090090909000 00 0 9 000000000000000 0909000900000090 000 0009090000090000 009009000090090 0002 OOOO o 0000000008 000900000000000
179. bled e Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Received The number of Received Querier 205 e V1 Reports Received e V2 Reports Received e V1 Leave Received e Router Port e Port e Status Buttons Retresh The number of Received V1 Reports The number of Received V2 Reports The number of Received V1 Leaves Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port Switch port number Indicates whether specific port is a router port or not Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh al Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 206 4 8 14 MLD Group Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this Page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table
180. c Policing Policies on the Switch Port DSCP Remarking gt Multicast Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Supports MLD Snooping v1 and v2 Querier Mode Support IGMP Snooping Port Filtering MLD Snooping Port Filtering MVR Multicast VLAN Registration gt Security 16 IEEE 802 1x Port based MAC based Network Access Authentication Built in RADIUS Client to co operate with the RADIUS Servers RADIUS TACACS Users Access Authentication IP based Access Control List ACL MAC based Access Control List Source MAC IP Address Binding DHCP Snooping to Filter Untrusted DHCP Messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP Packets with Invalid MAC Address to IP Address Binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks IP Address Access Management to Prevent Unauthorized Intruder Management Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web Switch Management SNMP v1 and v2c Switch Management SSH SSL and SNMP v3 Secure Access Four RMON Groups History Statistics Alarms and Events IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS Management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Client BOOTP and DHCP for IP Address Assignment Firmware Upload Download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay DHCP Option 82 User Privilege Levels Control NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and
181. ch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 e Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry SAVE Click to save changes 381 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 6 RMON History Status This page provides an overview of RMON History entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the History table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table screen in Figure 4 17 6 appears RMON History Overview start from Control Index o and Sample Index o with a entries per page History Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC aa Octets Pkts pacts a Pa Frag Jabb Coll Utilization Mo more entres Figure 4 17 6 RMON history overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control entry e Sa
182. change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears 116 LACP Port Configuration e rimae roy T ak f m E LL EL lo H EL NAAA A A A A A A A A E SSeS Se Se SRG BRA AAA AE EE EEE EE E Bi BB 2 Save Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot 117 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e LACP Enabled e Key e Role e Timeout e Partner Priority Buttons Save Click to save changes Description The switch port number means selection of all ports of Managed Switch Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait fora LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to The Timeout controls the period betwe
183. characters from 32 to 126 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 92 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Community Configuration public private Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons _ Add New User Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 93 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and Use
184. cted cables are with same pin assignment and color as the above picture before deploying the cables into your network 410 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY A ACE ACL ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest botto
185. ctive topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network 167 administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false A transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previous
186. curity Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are WE NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy WE Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy E Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible 94 Protocol authentication protocol are E None None authentication protocol E MDB5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol WE SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol NW The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol E DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed s
187. d everything in Maintenance mM Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups Configuration read only Configuration execute read write Status statistics read only Status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 57 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears NTP Configuration ao Disabled poal ntp org europe pool ntp org north america pool ntp org asla pool ntp org oceanla pool ntp ora Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When NTP mode operation is enabled the agent forwards NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain E Disabled Disable NTP mode operation e Timezone Allow select the time z
188. d if enabled DSCP is 0 Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP m All Classify all DSCP e Egress The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Port Egress Rewriting can be one of All means all ports will have one specific setting Disable No Egress rewrite Enable Rewrite enabled without remapping Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DPO table m Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DPO table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP1 table Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 230 4 9 8 DSCP Based QoS This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP Based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification DPL o 0 BE o E 2 a 3 C 4 a 5 4 a 7 a g cst O a el Mise 58 a ow 59 O 50 61 O 62 a 63 O Se Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Based QoS Ingress
189. d then by MAC address Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry 340 Buttons Add New Static Entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table Auto refresh L Start from VLAN 1 and MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 o with W entries per page ATA e ZA Ciye vian wacaddress eo e e eeh neee Static 00 55 44 4F 77 30 y Dynamic DO E0 4C 69 60 84 Static 33 33 00 00 00 01 y Static 33 33 00 00 00 02 y Static 33 33 FF 55 44 17 of Static 33 33 FF A8 00 64 y Static FF FF FF FF FF FF y Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of t
190. d to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page 86 System Information SNMPv3 Communities SNMPv3 Users SNMPv3 Groups SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 Accesses The system information is provided here Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears SNMP System Configuration SNMP va Write Community pavate 00 ES Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot The SNMP System Configuration page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Version e Read Community Description Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are
191. dd to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk _ Add New User Click to add a new view entry SAVE Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 97 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure Group Name E A default_ro group default_nw_group Security Model this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Access Configuration Security Level Read View Name NoAuth NoPriv default_view NoAuth NoPriv _ default_view Reset Write View Name None default_view any any _ Add New Entry Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e Group Name e Security Model e Security Level e Read View Name e Write View Name Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NW any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm E v Reserved for SN
192. ddress E 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address E Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings E 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address E 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address E Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings E 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 E 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 E Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings E 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 E 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 E Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings E 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 E 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 E Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected 263 Object e IP Protocol Filter e IP Protocol Value e IP TTL e IP F
193. dentifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner If Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto negotiation 360 e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC PHY capabilities Capabilities Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 361 4 14 5 Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears LLDP Neighbour Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address Part 1 00 6F 32 A5 E35 4B8 Pot SEPOOI7E01CSFF9 Realtek Intelligent Switch Bridge Port 1 Other Port 2 0 0 0 0 O017E01CSFFS P1 SEP0017ED01 C9FF9 cisco com SY PORT Bridge Talaphona Auto refresh C Refresh Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Local Port e Chassis ID e Remote Port ID e System Name e Port Description e System Capabilities e Management Address Description The port on which the LLDP frame was rec
194. des the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL 276 frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by s
195. down 2 1 3 Wiring the AC Power Input The rear panel of the NS4750 indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz 2 1 4 Wiring the DC Power Input The 6 contact terminal block connector on the front panel of NS4750 is used for two DC redundant power input Please follow the steps below to insert the power wire 1 Insert positive negative DC power wires into contacts 1 and 2 for DC POWER 1 or 5 and 6 for DC POWER 2 Pits 8 Ring RO E E FANZ Fault i a E FAN1 DC2 a E j NS4750 24S 4T 4X E ere PWR Dc 1 a6V G0V a DC Ev HaiElY Ela Figure 2 3 NS4750 24S 4T 4X Upper Panel 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC 1 DC 2 Figure 2 4 6 Pin Terminal Block Power Wiring Input 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 2 1 5 Wiring the Faulty Alarm Contact The fault alarm contacts are in the middle 3 amp 4 of the terminal block connector as the picture shows below Inserting the wires the Managed Switch will detect the fault status of the power failure or port link failure available for managed model when Fault Alarm function has been enabled The following illustration shows an appl
196. dress field that appears NW Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value e ICMP Code Filter Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE E Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE E Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is 265 e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object e TCP UDP Source Filter e TCP UDP Source No e TCP UDP Source Range e TCP UDP Destination Filter e TCP UDP Destination Number don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code
197. e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned 288 e Guest VLAN Enabled VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC286
198. e 4 6 21 appears 151 Protocol to Group Mapping Table Add New Entry Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 6 21 Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you select e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges 152 from Ox00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field v
199. e configuratioin the screen Figure 4 2 25 will appear save Running Configuration to startup config Please note The generation of the configuration file may be time consuming depending on the amount of non default configuration Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Save Page Screenshot 78 Save Running Configuration to startup config startup contig saved successtully Figure 4 2 25 Finish Saving Page Screenshot 4 2 21 Configuration Download The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format The files are either virtual RAM based or stored in flash on the switch There are three system files e running config A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch This file is volatile e startup config The startup configuration for the switch read at boot time e default config A read only file with vendor specific configuration This file is read when the system is restored to default settings It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running config thereby switching configuration Configuration Download page allows the download the running config startup config and default config on the switch Please refer to the Figure 4 2 26 shown below Download Configuration select configuration file to save Please note running contig may take a while to prepare for download running config default config startup contig Downl
200. e is untagged or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port but the frame is priority tagged VLAN ID 0 Mi On egress frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN The Port VLAN is called an Access VLAN for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type that is whether a frame s VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN and if so which TPID it reacts on Likewise on egress the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag if a tag is required Mm Unaware 131 On ingress all frames whether carrying a VLAN tag or not get classified to the Port VLAN and possible tags are not removed on egress MW C Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with a C tag E S Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with an S tag WE s Custom Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom S po
201. e number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted 330 e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and Unknown transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh al Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected port 331 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoo
202. e standard was originally defined by 419 IEEE 802 1s but was later incorporated in IEEE 802 1D 2005 Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system
203. e time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 177 4 7 9 Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 12 appears STP Statistics SN ste ste ste cn mste este ste ren Unknown legal No ports enabled OOO O oO Mo ports enabled The page includes the following fields Object e Port e MSTP e RSTP e STP e TCN e Discarded Unknown e Discarded Illegal Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Page Screenshot Description The switch port number of the logical RSTP port The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port The number of illegal Soanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page imm
204. e with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port 322 Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Limit Control o02 1 DHCP Snooping Voice VLAN Port Status MAC Count Port Users Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh L Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot ib 11 12 13 14 15 16 if 10 19 ha aa p3 k Ba pa pa pa po pa ES ls le FES E FS a ca The page i
205. eave packets to an IGMP router port E Auto Select Auto to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets a Fix The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port a None The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier Enable the fast leave on the port Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong 188 Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IG
206. ecessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependent Interface Media Dependent Interface Cross Tx transmit Tx transmit Tx transmit Tx transmit 409 The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your conne
207. ecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When 283 checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into
208. ed The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons a Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list D Moves the ACE down the list G Deletes the ACE D The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Reroove All Click to clear the counters Click to refresh the page immediately Click to remove all ACEs 257 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears ACE Configuration VLAN Parameters Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies NW All The ACE applies to all port E Portn The ACE applies to this port number where nis the number of the switch port e Pol
209. ed Managed Switch for Building Automation Networking The NS4750 is ideal for applications in the factory data centers and distributions It provides advanced Layer2 to Layer4 data switching and redundancy Quality of Service traffic control network access control and authentication and Secure Management features to protect customer s industrial network connectivity with reliable switching recovery capability that is suitable for implementing fault tolerant and mesh network architectures Powerful Security The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also comprise port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limiting the number of clients that pass through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before 13 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Managed Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI
210. ed Switch performs Store and Fforward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 5 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Managed Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode 1000Base T can be only connected in Full duplex mode 406 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The per port LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection of the Managed Switch Performance is bad Solution Check the speed duplex mode of the partner device The Managed Switch is run at Auto negotiation mode and if the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Per port LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Why the
211. ed on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can 317 only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Reopen Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost 4 12 2 Access Management Configure access management table on this Page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration Delete VLAN ID Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Add New Entry Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object
212. ed values 4 2 10 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Receive from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 Auto Refresh LJ Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Server Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive form Server The number of packets received from server e Receive Missing Agent The number of packets received without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing Circuit ID e Receive Missing The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing 64 Remote ID e Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID ID
213. ediately Clear Click to clear the information immediately 178 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Gi
214. eenshot 319 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the Managed Switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled 320 Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration Enabled V Tea Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation NW Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Possible modes are E Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation E Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert
215. eer MEP configured e Priority The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG if any e Cast Selection of APS PDU transmitted unicast or multi cast The unicast MAC will be taken from the Unicast Peer MAC configuration Unicast is only valid for L APS see Type The R APS PDU is always transmitted with multi cast MAC described in G 8032 e Type R APS APS PDU is transmitted as R APS this is for ERPS L APS APS PDU is transmitted as L APS this is for ELPS e Last Octet This is the last octet of the transmitted and expected RAPS multi cast MAC In G 8031 03 2010 a RAPS multi cast MAC is defined as 01 19 A7 00 00 XX In current standard the value for this last octet is 01 and the usage of other values is for further study Buttons Fault Management Click to go to Fault Management page Performance Monitoring Click to go to Performance Monitor page Refiesh Click to refresh the page immediately Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values a 4 19 3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch The Ethernet Ring Protection Switch instances are configured here screen in Figure 4 19 3 appears 395 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Delete ERPS 10 Porto Por 1 Pork 0 APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Port o SF MEP Port 1 SF MEP Ring Type Major Ring 10 Alarm Figure 4 19 3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch page screenshot The page includes the foll
216. efresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 247 4 9 16 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears 248 Voice VLAN Configuration Port Configuration lt All gt gabled UI isabled UI Disabled tabled UI Disabled abled UI 5 Disabled OUI 9 Disabled Disabled OUI 10 Disabled vw Disabled OUT 11 Disabled v Disabled OUI 12 Disabled Disabled v OUI 13 Disabled vw Disabled OUT o O 4 H Disabled Disabled El 4 4 4 I AA 4 4 lt lt I 4 4 5 16 4 4 17 Diaked Disa OU 18 Disabled Disabled OUI 19 Disabled Disabled OUI 20 Disabled Disa s OUI 21 Disabled Disabled OUI 22 23 24 25 Disabled Disa OUI 26 Disabled Disabled OUI 2 Disabled Disabled OUT 28 Disabled v Disabled v Sx 4 4 4 4 Figure 4
217. eived The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point 2 3 4 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address 362 Buttons Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 14 6 Port Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refer to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears LLDP Global Counters Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 00 00 00 16628 secs aga Total Neighbours Entr
218. eived and transmitted good and bad multicast packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The numeric of received and transmitted packet is per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object e Rx Drops e Rx CRC Alignment e Rx Undersize e Rx Oversize e Rx Fragments e Rx Jabber e Rx Filtered Description The numeric of frames is dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors The number of short frame received with valid CRC The number of long frame received with valid CRC The number of short fram received with invalid CRC The number of long frame received with invalid CRC The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port 105 1 Short frame is the frames that are smaller than 64 bytes 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters
219. empts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 11 9 RADIUS Details This Page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 10 appears 306 RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Other Info IP Address 00 00 00 State Disabled Round Trip Time ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped IP Address 00 000 State Disabled Round Trip Time ms Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot The
220. en BPDU transmissions Fast will transmit LACP packets each second while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears 118 LACP System Status Partner Partner Partner Last Local System ID Key Priority Changed Ports The page includes the following fields Object e Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key e Last changed e Local Ports Buttons Retresh No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto refresh LJ Refresh Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Page Screenshot Description The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID The time since this aggregation changed Shows which ports are a part of this aggregati
221. ending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 217 Authentication Client l Beal eae 802 1X Switch EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request PO EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request p EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept C Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP Message Exchange a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the
222. ent server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name IP Address State Round Trip RadiusAuthClient Time ExtRoundTripTim e RADIUS Accounting Statistics Description IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values NW Disabled The selected server is disabled WE Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running NW Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts mM Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of O ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS
223. entication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 279 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security gt AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 280 Network Access Server Configur
224. er the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Managed Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While selecting Compatibles mode the system uses the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1D s BPDU control packet 164 4 7 3 Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 5 appears STP Bridges Bridge ID Topology Topology Flag Change Last IST 80 00 00 6F 10 30 00 80 00 00 6F 10 30 00 O Steady Auto refresh L Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port cu
225. er to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MLD SFM Information Auto refresh O Start fram WLAN and Group with entries per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Fiter Switch No more entries ss Mo more entries Figure 4 8 18 MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Filter Switch source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table 208 gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 16 MVR Multicaset VLAN Registration The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on t
226. eriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears 370 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Cable Status Pair A 1 2 Length A Pair B 3 6 Length B Pair C 4 5 Length C Pair D 7 8 Length D Auto refresh Ll Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics Please be noticed that it is only affect to copper port not fiber port e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair Buttons Str Click to run the diagnostics 4 16 Loop Protection This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well 4 16 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations 371 General Settings Global Configuration seconds seconds y 4 shutdown Fort shutdown Fort shutdown Fort 4 AE lt x Shutdown Fort ehutdown Fort shutdown Fort Shutdown Por shutdown Port shutdown Fort ab 4 4 4 4 SE shutdown Fort 4 JEI k JIE 4 Juu 4 lt Shutdown Por shutdown Fort shutdown Por shutdown Port shutdown Fort 4 shutdown Fort AERE dub el shutdow
227. erver each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect CPU Once Conflict Mo entries Combined v Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status Page Screenshot 253 The page includes the following fields Object e User e Ingress Port e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Redirect e Mirror e CPU e CPU Once Description Indicates the ACL user Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are E All The ACE will match all ingress port E Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Indicates the frame type of the
228. es The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded 348 e Port Description e System Name e System Description e System Capabilities e Management Address Buttons Save
229. es the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 385 4 18 PTP 4 18 1 PTP Configuration PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems This page allows the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings PTP External Clock Mode D External Enable F VCXO Enable Clock Frequency PTP Clock Configuration Port List Clock Device y l Mo Clock Instances Present Figure 4 18 1 PTP External Clock Mode page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e One PPS Mode This Selection box will allow you to select the One_pps mode configuration The following values are possible 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put e External Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External Clock output The following values are possible 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External VCXO rate adjustment The following values are possible 386 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment e Clock Frequency This will allow setting the Clock Frequency The possible range of values are 1 25000000 1 25MHz
230. escription e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 8 VLAN Setting Example E Separate VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Trunk E Port Isolate 140 4 6 8 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 1 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switch 141 VLAN Overview FREEEERERE ERE EEE ee SS e TEE AA AAA AAA EE SESS ES 1 I a gaa PCr PC 2 PC 3 PC A PE B PEG Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untaoged Tagged VLAN 2 VLAN 3 AA AA AAA eee ee ee ee eee AAA o ee A rent fF Tt os aos o a m Figure 4 6 8 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams VLAN Group 1 Port 7 Port 10 N A Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described
231. ess is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assignea This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rul
232. ess or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard 274 The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS E Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS m Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authe
233. est VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Description These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx frames of any type that have been received by the switch Rx Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespld The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that have been received by 294 Rx Rx Rx Rx IX Tx Tx Responses Start Logoff Invalid Type Invalid Length Total Request Requests D 295 dot1xAuthEapolRespFr amesRx dot1xAuthEapolStartFra mesRx dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr amesRx dot1 xAuthInvalidEapolF ramesRx dot1xAuthEapLengthErr orFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx dot1xAuthEapolRegldFr amesTx dot1xAuthEapolRegFra mesTx the switch The number of valid EAPOL response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switc
234. evious Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class ll also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class l The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class i
235. ffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh L start fram WLAN and Group with 20 entries per page VLAN 1D Groun Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Fiter Switch Mo more entries OOOO bo more entries Figure 4 8 12 IGMP SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Filter Switch source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not But
236. fied number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized 278 state 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Method Fallback console telnet ssh Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values WE None authentication is disabled and login is not possible NW local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication W RADIUS use a remote RADIUS server for authentication E TACACSt use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Auth
237. figured for this MEP from this peer MEP Add New Peer MEP Click to add a new peer MEP Functional Configuration Instance Data Object e Enable e Priority e Frame rate Description Continuity Check based on transmitting receiving CCM PDU can be enabled disabled The CCM PDU is always transmitted as Multi cast Class 1 The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG if any In case of enabling Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM Priority has to be the same Selecting the frame rate of CCM PDU This is the inverse of transmission period as described in Y 1731 This value has the following uses The transmission rate of the CCM PDU Fault Cause cLOC is declared if no CCM PDU has been received within 3 5 periods see cLOC Fault Cause cPeriod is declared if a CCM PDU has been received with different period see cPeriod Selecting 300f sec or 100f sec will configure HW based CCM if possible Selecting other frame rates will configure SW based CCM In case of enabling 394 Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM Frame Rate has to be the same APS Protocol Object Description e Enable Automatic Protection Switching protocol information transportation based on transmitting receiving R APS L APS PDU can be enabled disabled Must be enabled to support ERPS ELPS implementing APS This is only valid with one P
238. fing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears IP Source Guard Configuration Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration i 2 3 Dista w Unin v 5 Dist w Unimied v 5 j Unlimited Unlimited Linlirnited E lt lt lt lt 4 4 yt kal Es El Z Sowa y I F lt al an 3 TEE 4 lt Soy ala EA ANA A A AA 13 Hed Linlirited 7 5 16 1 1 a 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot al Es g EA AAA NA A A A A A AAA lt lt 332 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port All means all ports will have one specific setting e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be O 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwa
239. following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP MLD Snooping It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full 210 Delete MVR VID MVR Name IGMP Address Mode Tagging Priority LLQI Interface Channel Setting Port Port Role Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16 MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers When the optional MVR VLAN name is given it should contain at least one alphabet MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames The default IGMP address is not set 0 0 0 0 When the IGMP address is not set system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN When the IPv4 management address is not set system uses the first available IPv4 management address Otherwise system uses a pre defined value By default this value will be 192 0 2 1 Specify the MVR mode of operation In D
240. from 1 to 65535 e Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters a log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol A snmptrap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol a logandtrap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public 379 e Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 4 RMON Event Status This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table screen in Figure 4 17 4 appears RMON Event Overview start from Control Index lo and
241. gh or low signal to external device The following topology shows how to wire DOO and DO1 GND DOO Power Source La ifs NS4750 24S 4T 4X Sprinkler System DO1 f GND Figure 2 8 Wires DOO and DO1 to Open Detector 29 2 2 Installing the Managed Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps In this paragraph we will describe how to install the Managed Switch and the installation points attended to it 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follow these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC DC power source as shown in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Place the Managed Switch on the Desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc 30 Connecting to the Managed Switch req
242. ging Hippa SENG ea EE _ F 5 iiis j if F ae 12 Flexible and Extendable Solution The 24 mini GBIC slots built in the NS4750 support dual speed 100Base FX and 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber optic modules meaning the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to the transmission distance or the transmission speed required to extend the network efficiently The NS4750 supports SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor function that can easily monitor real time parameters of the SFP for network administrator such as optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage Digital Diagnostic Monitor DDM Voltage Power Transceiver Power Receiver AC and DC Redundant Power to Ensure Continuous Operation IFS NS4750 is equipped with one 100 240V AC power supply unit and one additional 36 60V DC power supply unit for redundant power supply installation A redundant power system is also provided to enhance the reliability with either the 100 240V AC power supply unit or the DC 36 60V power supply unit Redundant Power Systems are specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity Furthermore with the 36 60V DC power supply implemented the NS4750 can be applied as the telecom level device that could be located in the electronic room Layer 2 Layer 4 Fully function
243. guration screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Filtering Profile 1 2 a 3 2 4 2 5 a E a 7 qa a a 23 F 24 E 25 dE 25 a 27 Hi 2 A Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button Buttons Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 204 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Status This Page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears Auto refresh LJ MLD Snooping Status Statistics LAWN Querier Querier Queries Queries Y1 Reports 2 Reports 1 Leaves ID Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Router Port 0 Ome Ww kh I Figure 4 8 16 MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disa
244. gure 4 11 7 appears RADIUS Server Configuration Global Configuration NAS Identifier Server Configuration Add New Server Figure 4 11 7 RADIUS Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Global Configuration These setting are common for all of the RADIUS Servers Object Description e Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 1000 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request e Retransmit Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 1000 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually 301 e Key e NAS IP Address NAS IPv6 Address e NAS Identifier Server Configuration trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this fie
245. h a tag MW Untag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted without a tag e Allowed VLANs Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become members of The field s syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field By default a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs and is therefore set to 1 4095 The field may be left empty which means that the port will not become member of any VLANs e Forbidden VLANs A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs This is particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field By default the field is left blank which means that the port may become a member of all possible VLANs The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status This Page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears 133 VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined W Autose esh O start from VLAN with 20 entries per page Port Members
246. h in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch e Backend Server These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative Counters states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce Challenges ssChallenges Rx Other dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests Requests ToSupplicant Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth 296 Description 802 1 X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most table 802 1 X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Successes Successes Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth Failures Fails TX Responses dot1xAuthB
247. h starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The current state of the port It can undertake one
248. hat are not classified to the Access VLAN e Onegress all frames classified to the Access VLAN are transmitted untagged Other dynamically added VLANs are transmitted tagged Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously and are normally used to connect to other switches Trunk ports have the following characteristics By default a trunk port is member of all VLANs 1 4095 e The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the use of Allowed VLANs o Frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are discarded e By default all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN a k a Native VLAN get tagged on egress Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C tagged on egress e Egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames in which case only tagged frames are accepted on ingress Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways but adds additional port configuration features In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports hybrid ports have these abilities Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware C tag aware S tag aware or S custom tag aware o Ingress filtering can be controlled Ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured independently Determines the port s VLAN ID PVID Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095 default being 1 Mi On ingress frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware the fram
249. he ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different p
250. he MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over 341 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields ear Flushes all dynamic entries kee Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt
251. he Multicast VLANs MX Ina multicast television application a PC or a network television or a set top box can receive the multicast stream HM Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address HM Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports It is allowed to create at maximun 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN There will be totally at maximun 256 group addresses for channel settings Service Provider a Multicast Server lt gt Layer 3 Multicast Router Service Network 5 MVR 2 Switch This Page provides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears Set Box 209 MVR Configurations MVR Mode Ds y VLAN Interface Setting Role Inactive S source R Recelver Delete MYR YID MYR Name IGMP Address Mode Tagging LLOI Interface Channel Profile Add New MVE YLAN Immediate Leave Setting Immediate Leave xs al Es 3 4 oN DM Ma qu c I Es Es F oo 4 23 7 25 26 Disabled i Disabled 20 Disabled Az Figure 4 8 19 MVR Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the
252. he Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 45 4 1 Main Web Page The Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status Main Functions Menu PP 2 4 6 4 5 26 28 E FAULT Ring nm p LA 1 3 PWR 1 3 5 T 9 11 Ss amp HA 9 21 23 25 2 f NS4750 24S 4T 4X System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANs Welcome to IFS Transmission Spanning Tree are NS4750 24S 4T 4X Access Control List Authentication l 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP 4 x 10G port Security MAC Address Table Management Switch LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection RMON Ring Logout l Help Button Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Main Screen Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows 46 Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define sy
253. he same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 5 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Managed Switch stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Managed Switch the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network 405 The Manag
254. he totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Port Y Auto refresh O Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Octets Tx Octets Rx Unicast Tx Unicast Rx Multicast Tx Multicast Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 ta Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Tx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description 104 e Rx and Tx Packets e Rx and Tx Octets e Rx and Tx Unicast e Rx and Tx Multicast e Rx and Tx Broadcast e Rx and Tx Pause The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes including FCS but excluding framing bits The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets The number of rec
255. hip status Displays VLAN port status Creates removes primary or community VLANs Enables disables port isolation on port Configures the MAC based VLAN entries Displays MAC based VLAN entries Configures the IP Subnet based VLAN entries Configures the protocol based VLAN entries Displays the protocol based VLAN entries 123 Membership 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inhe
256. ication example for wiring the fault alarm contacts 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 26 2 1 6 Wiring the Digital Input Output The 6 contact terminal block connector on the front panel of NS4750 24S 4T 4X is used for Digital Input and Digital Output Please follow the steps below to insert wire 1 The NS4750 24S 4T 4X offers two DI and DO groups 1 and 2 are DI groups 3 and 4 are DO groups and 5 and 6 are GND ground DIDO GND DC POWER ON DIO DI1 DOO DO1 GND GND NS4750 24S 4T 4X OFF DC en Fat Figure 2 5 Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs 217 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIO DI1 DOO DO1 GND GND Figure 2 6 6 Pin Terminal Block DI DO Wiring Input There are two Digital Input groups for you to monitor two different devices The following topology shows how to wire DIO and DI1 We use the NS4750 24S 4T 4X to be an example for describing DI application Door Open Detector GND DIO Power Source Sifts NS4750 245 4T 4X Smoke Sensor Fad i A GND Figure 2 7 Wires DIO and DI1 to Open Detector 28 3 There are two Digital Output groups for you to sense NS4750 24S 4T 4X port failure or power failure and issue a hi
257. ich located on the same domain or the same SMTP server you don t have to enable SMTP authentication It is for you to input your mail account name 71 e Authentication Password It is for you to input your mail account password e E mail From It is for you to input who send this mail e E mail Subject It is for you to input mail subject e E mail 1 To It is for you to input recipient mail address e E mail 2 To It is for you to input secondary recipient mail address Buttons Ega Click to test SMTP server address SAVE Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 16 Digital Input Output Digital Input allows user can log external device such as industrial cooler dead or alive or something else system will logs a user cistomize message into system log syslog issue SNMP trap or issue an alarm E mail Digital Output allows user to monitor the switch port and power and let system issue a high or low signal to an external device such as alarm when the monitor port or power has been failed The Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 19 appears 12 Digital Input Output Control Configuration C Enable C Enable Event System Log SNMP Trap System Log SNMP Trap Digital Output 0 Digital Output 1 C Enable C Enable Power Fail Port Fail DIO DI Event PowerFail Port Fail DIO DI1 ooo EA Condition Fao DC1 CDC 1 AC Power DC1 pC C AC Power
258. ict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority Weight pro 01 02 03 04 es Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Schedule Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 225 e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e QO Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified 1 2 3 4 2 6 f 5 3 10
259. icy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE E Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this 258 e Policy Value e Policy Bitmask e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e EVC Policer e EVC Policer ID e Port Redirect e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive E Any Any frame can match this ACE E Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to O600 hexadecimal E ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type E Pv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE NW Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation NW Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate
260. id Length values are between 0 and 30 bits for a IPv4 address IPv6 Address Provide the IP address of this Managed Switch A IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field 50 Mask The IPv6 network mask in number of bits prefix length Valid Length values are between 1 and 128 bits for a IPv6 address e IP Routes Delete Select this option to delete an existing IP route The destination IP network or host address of this route Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6 notation A default route can use the value 0 0 0 0or IPv6 notation Mask Length The destination IP network or host mask in number of bits orefix length Gateway The IP address of the IP gateway Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation Gateway and Network must be of the same type Next Hop VLAN The VLAN ID VID of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway Buttons _Add Interface Click to add a new IP interface A maximum of 128 interfaces is supported pao ote Click to add a new IP route A maximum of 32 routes is supported ABP Y J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 91 4 2 3 IP Status IP Status displays the status of the IP protocol layer The status is defined by the IP interfaces the IP routes and the neighbour cache ARP cache
261. ies Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 0 i 0 0 0 0 Se DO DO 8 O O O O O O O DO AO AO ASA D O DO O O O O O O O O O O GODO DO O O O O O O O O O oa O amp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D O D O O O O GO O O O GO GOGO GG G o GG adc amp D O DO O O O O O O O O O O OGO O O GOG O O O GO O GO O O OG amp D D D O O O O CA A EA OCA A CASA amp D O D O O O O G O O OOGO OGG O A CASA A y S O DO O O O O O O O O OG O GOG O O O O O O GO O GO O GO O s D DO DO O O O sS Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Global Counters 363 Object Neighbor entries were last changed at Total Neighbors Entries Added Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Local Counters Description It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Shows the number of LLDP frames dr
262. ify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled All means all ports will have one specific setting 270 e Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE 271 aS Click to save changes a Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone M y ww Click to clear the counters 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps 1 2 J A 5 6 fi Q 5 i 1 ek ome _ L e k ao e Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot g 272 2The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0
263. ig link to configure VLANs for this protection group Description It can be either RPL owner or RPL Neighbour This allows to select the east port or west port as the RPL block If the owner has to be changed then the clear check box allows to clear the RPL owner for that ERPS ring 399 Instant Command Object e Command e Port Instant State Object e Protection State e PortO e Port 1 e Transmit APS e Port 0 Receive APS e Port 1 Receive APS e WTR Remaining e RPL Un blocked e No APS Received e Port 0 Block Status e Port 1 Block Status e FOP Alarm Description Administrative command A port can be administratively configured to be in either manual switch or forced switch state Port selection PortO or Port1 of the protection Group on which the command is applied Description ERPS state according to State Transition Tables in G 8032 OK State of East port is ok SF State of East port is Signal Fail OK State of West port is ok SF State of West port is Signal Fail The transmitted APS according to State Transition Tables in G 8032 The received APS on Port 0 according to State Transition Tables in G 8032 The received APS on Port 1 according to State Transition Tables in G 8032 Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds APS is received on the working flow RAPS PDU is not received from the other end Block status for Port 0 Both traffic and R APS block status R APS channel is
264. igured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN a Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN 139 The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears Auto refresh LJ Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 1j2j3 4 5j6 7j8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 dy ap A 4 4 4 48 48 48 4 48 4 49 4 4 4 48 4 49 4 4 48 48 4 4 4 4 4 Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object D
265. ime between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds 347 LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object e Port e Mode e CDP Aware Description The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Select LLDP mode All means all ports will have one specific setting WE Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed E Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information E Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors E Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP fram
266. imiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs tag unaware 2 The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are 3 The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items VLAN Basic Information VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Memberships VLAN Membership Status VLAN Port Status Private VLAN Port Isolation MAC based VLAN MAC based VLAN Status IP Subnet based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Displays VLAN information Enables VLAN group Configures the VLAN membership Displays VLAN members
267. in the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately ear Gear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 365 4 15 Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Ping m IPv6 Ping Remote IP Ping E Cable Diagnostics PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmits ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics is performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses
268. ination value appears E Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame 266 that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP UDP Destination When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a Range specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE NW 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry NW 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE mM 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry NW 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE NW 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry NW 1 TCP frames where the RST field is se
269. ing any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a
270. ion Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE E Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are E Any Any value is allowed don t care NW Enabled Tagged frame only E Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE E Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care N
271. ion as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk that a LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility for that the neighbors has received the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission is repeated The recommended value is 4 times giving that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when a LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including between Network Connectivity Devices or to other types of links 351 Coordinates Location Object e Latitude e Longitude e Altitude e Map Datum Civic Address Location Description Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of
272. ion of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 2 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 82 Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version v1 5b140618 Date 2014 06 18119 00 10 0800 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version v1 5b140611 Date 2014 06 11118 06 17 0800 Activate Alternate Image Figure 4 2 30 Software Image Selection Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date where the firmware was produced Button Activate Altemate Image Click to choose Alternate Image as Activate Image 83 4 2 26 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 31 appears Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults The default configuration here doesnt involve IP address You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing
273. k boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons _ Addl new Private VLAN Ciok to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 138 Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 7 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other Internet Promiscuous Permit Public Servers Permit Promiscuous Access Denied Access Denied Access Denied Private VLAN For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the conf
274. l the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image is loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 4 2 19 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 23 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP 1 Firmware File Hame S Figure 4 2 23 TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do nat quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image is loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again T 4 2 20 Save Startup Config This function allows save the current configuration thereby ensuring that the current active configuration can be used at the next reboot screen in Figure 4 2 24 appears After saving th
275. late a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following E One switch is elected as the root switch E The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root E A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch E Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topolog
276. ld is left blank the IP address of the outgoing interface is used The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the IP address of the outgoing interface is used The identifier up to 253 characters long to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the NAS Identifier is not included in the packet The table has one row for each RADIUS Server and a number of columns which are Buttons Object e Delete e Hostname e Auth Port e Acct Port e Timeout e Retransmit e Key Description To delete a RADIUS server entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next Save The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting This optional setting overrides the global timeout value Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value Leaving it blank will use the global retransmit value This optional setting overrides the global key Leaving it blank will use the global key 302 Add New Server Click to add a new RADIUS server An empty row is added to the table and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed Up to 5 servers are supported Click to undo the addition of the new server Apply Click
277. lete user The page includes the following fields Buttons Object e User Name e Password e Privilege Level Add User User Settings Password again Privilege Level Save Reset Cancel Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration Page Screenshot Description A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores The password of the user The allowed string length is O to 32 The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 94 La 5 Z Click to save changes Et y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values f Click to undo any changes made locally and
278. lf duplex mode selection Port Configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status flow control status auto negotiation status trunk status 18 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN Port based VLAN VLAN Q in Q Private VLAN Edge PVE Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Port Trunking IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk 12 groups of 16 port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet Policy based QoS IGMP Snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Querier and Fast Leave mode support Access ControlLiat IP based ACL MAC based ACL Up to 256 entries Management Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMP v3 RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000Base T IEEE 802
279. lify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 10 appears 60 UPnP Configuration Advertising Duration Figure 4 2 10 UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are E Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation NW Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range of 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in
280. ll as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 Description The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 172 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 amp Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI Figure 4 7 9 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Descripti
281. ll assign to whole ports Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority All means all ports will have one specific setting e DP Level The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way All means all ports will have one specific setting e PCP The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default PCP for untagged frames All means all ports will have one specific setting e DEI The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default DEI for untagged frames All means all ports will have one specific setting e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port W Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames E Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping For more detail information please refer to chapter 4 9 3 1 e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 223 4 9 4 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification The cl
282. llowed E SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed NW IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames NW IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a fame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column 240 E DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Buttons Combined k Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Ll Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds a Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry incase conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 241 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There is a unic
283. llowing fields Object Description e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration is described as below W Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag EW VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs E PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any E DE Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any 237 e Any e Ethernet e LLC e SNAP e Pv4 e IPv6 E Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4 6 IPv6 Note All frame types are explained below Allow all types of frames Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within Ox600 OxFFFF or Any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and Ox86DD IPv6 default value is Any SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Con
284. lobally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Description The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received 292 Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Butt
285. local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Recording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregations may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 113 4 5 1 Static Aggregation This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relates to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCPYUOP Port Num
286. ly saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 802 1w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 a herne 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Sn Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs 168 Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk 2 000 000 1 000 000 500 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 10 000 5 000 Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 169 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration CIST MS TH MSTI2 MSTI3 MSTIA MSTIS MSTIG MSTIT Save Reset Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Priority Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI
287. m Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is 411 incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is a
288. mber of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol a InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol a InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal 5 InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol a InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol a OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters a OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit a OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packet is normal OutErrors The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors a OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Al Absolute Get the sample directly a Delta Calculate the difference between samples default The value of the statistic during the last sampling period The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are
289. mple Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address 382 e CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent
290. n Fort shutdown Part shutdown Port shutdown Port ehutdown Fort lt j T lt 4 shutdown Por shutdown Port shutdown Part shutdown Por shutdown Port shutdown Port Figure 4 16 1 Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot JERE JUL el 4 au 4 lt x 4 j lt LI lt j T lt 372 The page includes the following fields General Settings Object e Enable Loop Protection e Transmission Time e Shutdown Time Port Configuration Object e Port e Enable e Action e Tx Mode Buttons Save Click to save changes Description Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are O to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Description The switch port number of the port Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and
291. n Page Screenshot 338 The page includes the following fields Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface 339 Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID an
292. n acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select AMS is used for dual media ports ports supporting both copper cu and fiber SFP cables AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media If both SFP and cu cables are inserted the port will select the prefered media APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel is to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched again
293. n this switch port means selection all ports of Managed Switch Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps All means all ports will have one specific setting If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 218 4 9 3 Port Shaping This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears QoS Egress Port Shapers Port Port i 2 3 4 2 6 T 5 3 0 11 12 13 ig 15 16 i 18 3 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 20 rh Ba pa pao po pa pao pa ls ES les les le ES ES Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
294. naged Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 1927 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication Without a secure connection User name Ea admin ww Password sesse Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin 44 After entering the username and password the main screen appears as shown in Figure 4 1 3 NS4750 24S 4T 4X System SNMP i Port Management Link Aggregation VLANS Welcome to IFS Transmission Spanning Tree seus NS4750 24S 4T 4X Access Control List l Authentication 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP 4 x 10G port I Security MAC Address Table Management Switch LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection RMON Ring Logout Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch The changed IP address take effect immediately after clicking on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access t
295. nally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table Mi IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Customer A s LAN Branch Office Customer A s LAN nie
296. namic IP Source Guard Table gt gt ES Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 344 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears 345 LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters Tx Interval cd a Ee x fo
297. nclude but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class lll The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP 358 e LLDP MED Capabilities e Application Type media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are _ LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification 2 3 4 Extended Power via MDI PSE 5 Extended Power via MDI PD 6 Inventory 7 Reserved Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this net
298. ncludes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services Object Description 323 e User Module Name e Abbr Port Status The full name of a module that may request Port Security services A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Users e State e MAC Count Current Limit Buttons Description The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The
299. nfiguration System Information System Name The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location The MAC Address of this Managed Switch 48 e Power The AC Power Power 1 and Power 2 ON OFF Status display e Temperature The temperature shows current of the switch inside temperature status e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the Managed Switch e Software Date The date when the switch software was produced Buttons Auto refresh d Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page 4 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DNS Server Ne DNS server Ys DNS Proxy L IP Interfaces Delete YLAN o Of 15216010 id IP Routes L 0 0 0 0 O 192 160 0 254 0 Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration Page Screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e IP Configurations Configure whether the IP stack should act as a
300. nnect and use a network service A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP 423 Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message
301. nt links 111 Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation TNT 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps a a 2D Las Veo Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation Topology The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other 112 Layer 2 switches However before mak
302. nt to the Switch or the power adapter Mi DC Power Connector The front panel of the Managed Switch contains a power switch and a DC power connector which accepts DC power input voltage from 36V to 60V DC Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input terminal block The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 M Digital Input The digitail input of the Managed Switch can be activated by the external sensor that senses physical changes These changes can include intrusion detection or certain physical change in the monitored area For example the external sensor can be a door switch or an infrared motion detector MM Digital Output The digital output main function is to allow the Managed Switch to trigger external devices either automatically or by remote control from a human operator or a software application 2 1 2 LED Indications E System Color Function Lights Indicates that Ring state is in idle mode Blinks Indicates that the Ring state is in protected mode Lights Indicates that the switch is set to ring owner Off Indicates that the switch doesn t set to ring owner Green Lights Indicates that the Switch is powered on by DC1 input Green Lights indicates that the Switch is powered on by DC2 input Green Lights Indicates that Fan 1 has stopped LED 23 FAN Green Lights Indicates that Fan 2 has stopped Faut Green Lights Indicates that Switch AC DC or port has failed Ligh
303. ntication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch inclu
304. ntication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States 275 Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server Internet Authenticator b Intranet 802 1X aware Switch Client with 802 1X authe
305. o frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Notice This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003du Canada 2004 108 EC EMC Directive Hereby UTC Building amp Industrial Systems Inc declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2004 108 EC For contact information see www interlogix com or www utcfssecurityproducts eu TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION said 10 kA Packet CONAN Saa aaa 10 122 PFOGUCT DESCFIDILON Sari A A A id 11 1 3 Aow to Use This Man Ula ss ion iconos osics 14 1 A Proquct FOATUINGS til teene laste icewteredans baviebielenteah aaae a iweb ceeas 15 1S Product SDECITICAT ONS ui A A A seeecnah aan 18 2 INSTALLATION ae aa pees eatin ca ua seta es ea aciendo 21 2 1 Maraware Descriptions ii aaa tere giul dal aa aa aa a aaaea 21 ZA Eron RANA nas 21 Meee e A A sden asmiausigteiuns 23 2 120 Wiring MSAC POWer INPUT artesani
306. o that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 216 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 4 4 9 2 Port Policing This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears QoS Ingress Port Policers a aa S Ll 2 LL al d L i T V E L LU E 5 Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot 217 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Enabled e Rate e Unit e Flow Control Buttons Save Click to save changes Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Controls whether the policer is enabled o
307. oad Configuration Figure 4 2 26 Configuration Download Page Screenshot 79 4 2 22 Configuration Upload page allows the upload the running config and startup config on the switch Please refer to the Figure 4 2 27 shown below Upload Configuration File To Upload es ee Destination File running config Replace Merge startup config Create new file i Upload Configuration Figure 4 2 27 Configuration Upload Page Screenshot If the destination is running config the file will be applied to the switch configuration This can be done in two ways e Replace mode The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the uploaded file e Merge mode The uploaded file is merged into running config If the file system is full i e contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files it is not possible to create new files but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first 80 4 2 23 Configuration Activate Configuration Activate page allows to activate the startup config and default config files present on the switch Please refer to the Figure 4 2 28 shown below Activate Configuration Select configuration file to activate The previous configuration will be completely replaced potentially leading to loss of management connectivity Please note The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup config automatically default config start
308. of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Mi Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default WE Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the
309. olicies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN 354 Object e Delete e Policy ID e Application Type e Tag Description Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a sep
310. on e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration 173 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Priority MSTI Normal Ports Configuration tT Dae f par iL an Path Cost gt Bl gt RARER e Cena Save Figure 4 7 10 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot 174 The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 All means all ports will have one specific setting e Priority The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons cet Click to set MSTx configuration Save Click to save changes Reset
311. on all ports and work normally 124 Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header Mi 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Dest Addr Src Addr E type Length E type New CRC Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 byte
312. on for this switch Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh al Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 4 LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears 119 LACP Status Partner Partner Partner 1 2 J 4 6 T o The page includes the following fields Object e Port e LACP e Key Auto refresh L Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status Page Screenshot Description The switch port number Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile its LACP status is disabled The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together 120 e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner port number connected to this port Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics port LACP LACP Received Transmit
313. onds Auto refresh Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels Groups Information Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 214 4 8 19 MVR SFM Information Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The MVR SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group Address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4 8 22 appears MVR SFM Information Auto refresh Dl Star fom VLAN I Jano Group adress Jo ts por page YLA ID Group Port Mode Source Address Hardware Filter Switch No porte entries Figure 4 8 22 MVR SFM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Buttons VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Add
314. one according to current location of switch e Server Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons 58 Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 7 Time Configuration Configure Time Zone on this Page A Time Zone is a region that has a uniform standard time for legal commercial and social purposes It is convenient for areas in close commercial or other communication to keep the same time so time zones tend to follow the boundaries of countries and their subdivisions The Time Zone Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears Time Zone Configuration Time Zone Configuration Daylight Saving Time Configuration Daylight Saving Time Mode Daylight Saving Time Disabled el Offset Offset Settings o Figure 4 2 9 Time Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description 99 Buttons Click to apply changes e Time Zone e Acronym e Daylight Saving Time
315. ons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears NAS Statistics Port 1 Port State Force Authorized Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot 293 The page includes the following fields Port State Object e Admin State e Port State e QoS Class e Port VLAN ID Port Counters Object e EAPOL Counters Description The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Gu
316. ontrol frame priority level generated by the system These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic The allowed range is O best effort to 7 highest default interface priority value is O Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields e Updates the table starting from the firs
317. opped due to that the entry table was full Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received 364 e Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received with
318. or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the perform
319. orm retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Enable disable that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are E Warm Start Enable disable Warm Start trap NW Cold Start Enable disable Cold Start trap 90 e Interface Indicates that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are NW Link Up Enable disable Link up trap NW Link Down Enable disable Link down trap NW LLDP Enable disable LLDP trap e AAA Indicates that the AAA group s traps Possible traps are Authentication Fail Enable disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap e Switch Indicates that the Switch gr
320. orward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Port Status Port 1 Peet MAC Address LAN ID Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e MAC Address amp VLAN ID e State e Time of Addition e Age Hold Description The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address 325
321. other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 126 VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame MM Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Mi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is
322. oup s traps Possible traps are NW STP Enable disable STP trap E RMON Enable disable RMON trap Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 91 4 3 4 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears system Information Configuration system Contact System Name NS4750 245 4T 4X System Location Apply Reset Figure 4 3 3 System Information Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII
323. our pr pot SEM pon py Mepb hep 1 f Mep 2 Mepi3 Ba lan Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 2 Connect PC to switch 2 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Log in on the Switch 2 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Set All Switch Number 3 and Number ID 2 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 2 Set MEP3 Port2 MEP4 Port1 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 2 403 Lhwner Neighbour witch 1 Dor pis Part a Prep Mep 3 A Mep d4 lep 5 lan Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 3 Connect PC to switch 3 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Log in on the Switch 3 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Switch _ Set All Switch Number 3 and Number ID 3 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 3 Set MEP5 Port2 MEP6 Port1 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 3 Neighbour one pot SDS pon _ A _ py Mep Mep 5 ra Mep b Mep 1 lan end of ERPS Lhwner switch 1 eee e To avoid loop please don t connect switch 1 2 amp 3 together in the ring topology before configuring the Follow the configuration or ERPS wizard to connect the Switch 1 2 8 3 together to establish ERPS application MEP2 lt gt MEP3 Switch1 Port2 lt gt
324. owing fields Object Description e Delete This box is used to mark an ERPS for deletion in next Save operation e Port 0 This will create a Port O of the switch in the ring e Port 1 This will create Port 1 of the switch in the Ring As interconnected sub ring will have only one ring port Port 1 is configured as 0 for interconnected sub ring 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 is associated with this instance e Port 0 SF MEP The Port O Signal Fail reporting MEP e Port 1 SF MEP The Port 1 Signal Fail reporting MEP As only one SF MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 SF MEP is associated with this instance e Port 0 APS MEP The Port 0 APS PDU handling MEP e Port 1 APS MEP The Port 1 APS PDU handling MEP As only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 APS MEP is associated with this instance e Ring Type Type of Protecting ring It can be either major ring or sub ring e Major Ring ID Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub ring It is used to send topology change updates on major ring If ring is major this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring e Alarm There is an active alarm on the ERPS Buttons Add New Protection Group Click to
325. pe Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are EW Any The ACE will match any frame type mM EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol 256 e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Redirect e Mirror e Counter e Modification Buttons Buttons IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP E IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned NW Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are NW All The ACE will match all ingress port NW Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are E Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored E Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabl
326. pply power to the Managed Switch 32 2 3 Cabling 10 100 1000Base T and 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX All 10 100 1000Base T ports come with auto negotiation capability They automatically support 1000Base T 100Base TX and 10Base T networks Users only need to plug a working network device into one of the 10 100 1000Base T ports and then turn on the Managed Switch The port will automatically run in 10Mbps 20Mbps 100Mbps or 200Mbps and 1000Mbps or 2000Mbps after the negotiation with the connected device The Managed Switch has eight SFP interfaces that support 100 1000Mbps dual speed mode Optional multi mode single mode 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP module m Cabling Each 10 100 1000Base T port uses RJ 45 sockets similar to phone jacks for connection of unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The IEEE 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab Fast Gigabit Ethernet standard requires Category 5 UTP for 100Mbps 100Base TX 10Base T networks can use Cat 3 4 5 or 1000Base T use 5 5e 6 UTP see table below Maximum distance is 100 meters 328 feet The 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP slot is used as LC connector with optional SFP module Please see table below and know more about the cable specifications Port Type Cable Type Connector 10Base T Cat 3 4 5 2 pair RJ 45 Any Ethernet devices like hubs PCs can be connected to the Managed Switch by using straight through wires The two 10 100 1000Mbps ports are auto MDI MDI X which can be used on straigh
327. r Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 User Configuration Delete Enaine ID User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy g Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password 600007e501f1000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys Ina simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Se
328. r the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 264 e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP Mask e DIP Filter e DIP Address e DIP Mask Specify the source IP filter for this ACE E Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care NW Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears WE Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE E Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care NW Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Ad
329. ragment e IP Option Description Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter Pv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will apper These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set o
330. rame F FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading lt also provides directory service and security features Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD 415 HTTP HTTPS HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to
331. rding that are matched in static entries on the specific port All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons EG belts Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears Static IP Source Guard Table Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot 333 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e MAC address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 12 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12
332. remote telnet and the other is operating from console port Remote telnet is an IP based protocol and console port is for user to operate the NS4750 24S 4T 4X on local only however their operation is the same The command line user interface is for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can access the Managed Switch remote telnet interface from personal computer or workstation in the same Ethernet environment as long as you know the current IP address of the Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser 192 168 0 X Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable Dalla alamo IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 1 Remote Telnet and Console Port Interface Management In Windows system you may click Start then choose Accessories and Command Prompt Please input telnet 192 168 0 100 and press enter from your keyboard You will see the following screen see Figure 3 2 appear COM1_115200 Password Jaguar 1 board detected SC7460 Rev B RAM 0x80000000 0x88000000 0x80020908 0x87fe1000 available FLASH 0x40000000 0x40ffffff 256 x 0x10000 blocks Executing boot script in 3 000 seconds enter C to abort gt fis load d managed Image loaded from 0x80040000 0x8083d8b8 Welcome toNS4750 24S 4T 4X Command Line Interface Port Numbers Login in progress NS4750 245 4T 4X gt ANSIW 115200 8 N 1
333. rently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features a Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices Priority tagging MM IEEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN requires tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allows a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging m The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled
334. ress Type Hardware Filter Switch Description VLAN ID of the group Group address of the group displayed Switch port number Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 When there is no any source filtering address the text None is shown in the Source Address field Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source Pv4 IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Auto refresh bese Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields 215 ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You
335. return to the Users Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Users Configuration Privilege Level Add New User Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration Page Screenshot If you forget the new password after changing the default password please press the Reset button on the front panel of the Managed Switch for over 10 seconds and then release it The current setting including VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup is completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password and the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears 55 Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Levels al dee in ra mo ma Read only Fy pur ll nan rm ae Fa an Fa J Pim Fa Fy mE nar rm eal Fa Ean Ly she mm J Fa mi shen a mw e LL an ae Read write igura Laja La _ a a amp En T _ a T o kam T tm a dy D EE gt gt S ae ll gt gt gt La a ar ur EE AE AE SS 1 12 EE ll AE Er em en fer er ping Diagnostics ERPS PMI Snoo LACP E a g A TL 31 oO EE AE AE ME EE AE A All A Sl SA SS ea a
336. rity frames when traffic builds up within a queue A frame s DP level is used as input to WRED A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is 429
337. rrently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 165 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well The CIST Port 6 appears T Configuration screen in Figure 4 E 2 co han O Fa E o O le O OL E u O OL E un D mo i T 1 o DL ili 42 T pa dl T ca ra i re iy I a EE o 5 amp a di e Lo a cL a Giz Ll Ld HE E a 2 uw o JA al a g LLJ A H al a LLJ Tl a ia Ta ES t kl im par fa i E a We LLJ ya i a EL A CIST Normal Port Configuration STP aires 2 Port Enabled Path Cost Admin Edge Auto Edge Point to point BPDU Guard Restricted TCH Role SIS AA A AA AA A A A A A 2lelelellelelelelelel elel ell lel ell elle SIRE EEE IEEE he Add de lA del ll del ae Pl E ae a a ee
338. rresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediately Ketresh Clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear ALL This button is available in the following modes 299 e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 300 4 11 6 RADIUS This Page allows you to configure the RADIUS Servers The RADIUS Configuration screen in Fi
339. rt to previously saved values 202 4 8 12 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port AMLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Confi
340. rt to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediately Xx ale Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC based VLAN Table 150 PA Es Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status This page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static static Y Auto refresh Ll O A a mac address vian 101 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 x0 1a 12 33 14 15 16 17 19 39 20 21 22 23 2 25 26 27 20 No data exists for the user Figure 4 6 20 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 13 Protocol based VLAN This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol based VLAN screen in Figur
341. rts get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with the custom S tag e Ingress Filtering Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering Access and Trunk ports always have ingress filtering enabled M iif ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded M Ifingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of e Ingress Acceptance Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress MW Tagged and Untagged Both tagged and untagged frames are accepted M Tagged Only Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress Untagged frames are discarded MW Untagged Only Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress Tagged frames are discarded Egress Tagging This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress es Untag Port VLAN 132 Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag NW fag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted wit
342. s show Topology Click to show the ring topology 4 19 6 Ring Wizard Example RPL None RPL Owner o y i Port 1 Port 2 MEP 1 MEP 2 VLAN 3001 VLAN 3001 o o O A le UT Switch 1 aaa N Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 MEP 6 MEP 5 MEP 3 VLAN 3001 VLAN 3001 300 VLAN 3001 RPL None RPL None RPL None RPL Neighbour Figure 4 19 6 Ring Example Diagram The above topology often occurs on using ERPS protocol The multi switch constitutes a single ERPS ring all of the switches only are configured as an ERPS in VLAN 3001 thereby constituting a single MRPP ring Switch 2 rots e nome moor Switch 3 rez s vow mor Table 4 2 ERPS Configuration Table The scenario is described as follows 1 Disable DHCP client and set proper static IP for Switch 1 2 amp 3 In this example switch 1 is 192 168 0 101 switch 2 is 192 168 0 102 and switch 3 is 192 168 0 103 2 On switch 1 2 amp 3 disable spanning tree protocol to avoid confliction with ERPS Setup steps Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 1 Connect PC to switch 1 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Log in on the Switch 1 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Set All Switch Number 3 and Number ID 1 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 1 Set MEP 1 Port1 MEP2 Port2 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 1 Owner Neighb
343. s jale Q in Q VLAN Tunnel MAN Edge Switch MAN Service Provider Domain i Q in Q l oe Tag A VLAN 1 20 VLAN 1 20 cal VLAN Tag p m y Qin Q Backbone Cone Switch VLAN Tag Tag VLAN Tag Tag eg sees VLAN 1 30 Q in Q VLAN Tunnel ipso i VLAN Tag The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent 128 of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is
344. s 12 The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Provides the current link speed of the port Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode E All Setups whole ports with the same setting Disable Shutdowns the port manually 10 HDX Forces setting 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10 FDX Forces setting 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 HDX Forces setting 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100 FDX Forces setting 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1G FDX Force setting 1000Mbps Full Duplex mode 10G FDX Forces setting 10000Mbps Full duplex mode Auto Fiber 10G Setup 10G firber port for negotiation automatically Auto Fiber Setup 1G fiber port for negotiation automatically M Auto Setup Auto negotiation When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is
345. s 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Old CRC Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet 125 M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID
346. s per page Figure 4 8 6 IPMC Profile Address Configuration Page The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e Entry Name The name used for indexing the address entry table Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters At least one alphabet must be present e Start Address The starting IPv4 IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range e End Address The ending IPv4 IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range 185 Buttons Add New Address Range Entry J Click to add new address range Specify the name and configure the addresses Click Save Apply Click to apply changes _Reset_ Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values _Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 186 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Configuration This Page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMiCyv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM
347. s the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend 285 authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client
348. sidered E Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are NW Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled W Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are NW Replace Replace the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it NW Keep Keep the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message 63 that already contains it E Drop Drop the package when receiving a DHCP message that already contains relay information Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously sav
349. speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE8 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with IE Browser 192 168 0 X Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable scocca ooe IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 43 E Logging on the Managed Switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address is shown as follows http 192 168 0 100 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Ma
350. ss The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Liceul Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by MAC address The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from VLAN and IP address 0 000 with 20 entries per page Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Screenshot 343 Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP So
351. ss Location Emergency Call Service c Policies Policy 10 Application Te No entres present Figure 4 14 2 LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot 350 The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object e Fast start repeat count Description Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED informat
352. st a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link 412 C CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network
353. statistic samples available from Statistics E Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records NW Event A list of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 1 appears RMON Alarm Configuration Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Ai New Ens Figure 4 18 1 RMON Alarm configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 375 e Variable e Sample Type e Value e Startup Alarm e Rising Threshold e Rising Index Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are A InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters InUcastPkts The nu
354. stem parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears Figure 4 1 5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 47 4 2 System Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under the System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Contact Name Location MAC Address Power Status Temperature System Date System Uptime Software Version Software Date System NS4750 24S 4T 4X Hardware 00 23 6f 6b 45 5a DC PWR1 OFF DC PWR OFF AC PWR ON 54 0C 129 0F Time 1970 01 03 Sat 22 56 24 00 00 2d 22 56 24 Software v1 55140618 2014 06 18119 00 10 0800 Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Contact e Name e Location e MAC Address Description The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact The system name configured in Co
355. sumienscee 386 A O a 386 A A een 387 AUS RUING A sveusaressasetesusccusee E E E E E 389 ASA MEP SON IgUra Os A A A A 390 419 2 Detailed MEP CONIQU MON ins A AA A A AA AAA A 392 119 0 EINErne U RNO Protocol WIO ici 395 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch ConfiguratiON ccccoonccccnoccnnococonononcnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnannnnnns 397 ci Ohad ho HES 41 0 6 VNI A Dee ener ee Pesce RPE Per PER EO Dee er er ore ere eae oC 401 AO GRING Wizard EXAM DIC a SA 402 E AAA A A E A 405 Sol Address Table iii A A A A 405 De Cai 405 9 9 FOrWardihNg Gr FUI da 405 Dif SLOFE ANG FORW ANG anida ida 405 D D AULO NGCGOUATIONN unto 406 6 TROUBLESHOOTING iuiu ii 407 APPENDIX Asa aaa 409 A 1 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base Toooonnannccccnonocccccccccccnonnnonnnnnnnnnnaaaannnnnos 409 A 2 10 100Mbp5 TOMOIBAS UA a 409 APRENDI B ho ny Geren en ee ee ee ee ae eee ee vcd 411 1 INTRODUCTION IFS NS4750 24S 4T 4X is a 24 port 100 1000Base X SFP 4 port 10G SFP L2 L4 Managed Switch The NS4750 24S 4T 4X is all multiple Gigabit SFP mini GBIC slots switch plus four Gigabit Copper combo ports with connective ability and robust layer 2 features The description of the NS4750 24S 4T 4X is shown below NELLA 24 port 100 1000Base X SFP 4 port 10G SFP L2 L4 Managed Metro Ethernet Switch 10 60 degrees C Managed Switch mentioned in this User s Manual refers to the NS4750 24S 4T 4X 1 1 Packe
356. switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to base on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP SyncE ls an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is
357. switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses NW Single 802 1X E Multi 802 1X E MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unch
358. switch will send ETH CCM message to check the link status in the ring group When the failure of network connection occurs the nodes block the failed link and report the signal failure message The RPL owner switch will automatically unblock the PRL to recover from the failure Normal Link Status ETH CCM E AA III Ethernet Node4 RPL Owner Ethernet J Ethernet Node2 RPL Nelghbour l GQ Ring Protection Link a Beia Faih 389 Fault Link Status RPL Owner Ethernet Node x Ethernet Node2 RPL Neighbour a Gt Paw well black off wher link failure oscurs Anal fallure RE Dafa Path 4 19 1 MEP Configuration The Maintenance Entity Point instances are configured here as screen in Figure 4 19 1 is shown below Maintenance Entity Point Delete instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagued vi This mac Alarm Figure 4 19 1 MEP configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 390 Buttons Delete This box is used to mark an MEP for deletion in next Save operation Instance The ID of the MEP Click on the ID of an MEP to enter the configuration page Domain Port This is an MEP in the Port Domain Flow Instance is a Port Esp Future use Evc This is an MEP in the EVC Domain Flow Instance is an EVC Mpls Future use Mode MEP This is a Maintenance Entity End Point MIP
359. t The Page includes the following fields 136 Object e Port e Port Type e Ingress Filtering e Frame Type e Port VLAN ID e Tx Tag e Untagged VLAN ID Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Shows the PVID setting for the port Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur NW Functional Conflicts between feature NW Conflicts due to hardware limitation NW Direct conflict between user mod
360. t Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items M The NS4750 24S 4T 4X x 1 M Quick Installation Guide x 1 M User s Manual CD x 1 M DB9 to RJ 45 Consol Cable x 1 Rubber Feet x4 M Rack Mount Accessory Kit xX 1 M AC Power Cord x 1 M Dust Cap x 33 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately If possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 10 1 2 Product Descriptions Multiple SFP Fiber Port Switch for Increasing Long reach Networking of Enterprise Telecoms and Campus The NS4750 is equipped with advanced management functions and provides 24 100 1000Mbps dual speed SFP fiber ports 4 10Gbps dual speed fiber ports and 4 10 100 1000Mbps TP SFP ports delivered in a rugged strong case It is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 128Gbps in the temperature range from 10 to 60 degrees C without any packet loss and CRC error which greatly simplify the tasks of upgrading the enterprise LAN for catering to increasing bandwidth demands The NS4750 is specially designed for service provider to deliver profitable Ethernet network The NS4750 adopts Front Access design making the wiring and maintenance of the NS4750 placed in a cabinet very easy for technicians AC Power DC Power 4 X
361. t entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID 190 gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New GME WLAN Click to add new IGMP VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 191 4 8 6 IGMP Group Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGM
362. t must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE NW 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry NW 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE mM 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry NW 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE W 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match 267 m Ethernet Type Parameters this entry Mm 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry E Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object e EtherType Filter e Ethernet Type Value Buttons Save Click to save changes Description Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE E Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value
363. t save The name used for indexing the profile table Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters At least one alphabet must be present Additional description which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric characters about the profile No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description Use or to separate the description sentence When the profile is created click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the designated profile Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following buttons MP List the rules associated with the designated profile Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile 184 Buttons Add New IPM Profile Click to add new IPMC profile Specify the name and configure the new entry Click Save Apply J Click to apply changes _Reset_ Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 3 Address Entry This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile It is allowed to create at maximum 128 address entries in the system The Profile Table screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration start fram VLAN with 20 entrie
364. t through or crossover cable 33 2 3 1 Installing the SFP Transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch as Figure 2 9 shows below SFP Transceiver LC Fiber Cable Figure 2 9 Plugging in the SFP Transceiver Approved INTERLOGIX SFP Transceivers INTERLOGIX Managed Switch supports 100 1000 dual mode with both single mode and multi mode SFP transceivers The following list of approved INTERLOGIX SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver Modules S30 RJ SFP Port 1000Base T Module 100M S35 2MLC SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module 550M 40 75 C S30 2MLC 2 SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module 2KM 0 50 C S35 2SLC 10 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 10KM 40 75 C S35 2SLC 30 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 30KM 40 75 C S35 2SLC 70 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 7OKM 40 75 C S30 1SLC B 10 SFP Port 1000Base BX GBIC module 10KM 0 50 C S30 1SLC B 20 SFP Port 1000Base BX GBIC module 20KM 0 50 C S30 1SLC B 60 SFP Port 1000Base BX GBIC module 60KM 0 50 C 20 2SLC 2 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 1310nm 2KM 0 50 C 20 2SLC 20 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 1310nm 20KM 0 50 C S20 ISLC A 20
365. t up the correct gateway IP address Button Start Click to start transmitting ICMP packets Click to re start diagnostics with PING 367 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Length Ping Interval Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Button Sart Click to start transmitting ICMP packets Click to re start diagnostics with PING 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon 368 reception of a reply The page refreshes
366. t visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table screen in Figure 4 17 8 appears RMON Statistics Status Overview Auto refresh Ll start from Control Index o with 20 entries per page e Octets Pkts Enga da Beaches Frag Jabb Coll a pi P 208 els ifindex 127 255 511 1023 1589 Mo more entres Figure 4 17 8 RMON Statistics Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Statistics entry e Data Source ifindex The port ID which wants to be monitored e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and 384 multicast packets received Broad cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Multi cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error
367. ted Illegal 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 i 0 i i i i i i i i i i i i GA A O A O O O O O O O O O O A O O O O O Gs amp es es es ee GA A A A A A A A OGO O O O O A A A A GO A A es A ee ee ee E AA AA A A AA AA AA AA OOOO O Oo Oo a amp a Auto refresh L 121 Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 122 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segments the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by l
368. ted configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality w WER WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages is using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia 428 WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of
369. ted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 221 4 9 4 Port Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classification screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears tion fica rt Classi QoS Class DP Level PCP DEI Tag Class DSCP Based ngress Po Qos AA A AA AA A A A A A A A A aa EE NENE NENE ENEE AE AE AE ME SE A ESE en SNE cjela lole lele lalele lela lalo oleo elofe ole oe e o ls EEE AE EE AE EE AE EE AE EEE a at E AIESEC AE p S lololelofole loto le jolejo of loelofeloelofe oleo oe e o ES EE EA ANECA EE AE AE S A EE AIESEC AIESEC a gt cjele lole lele lalele lela lalo elos elos lolo oe e o EE E AE EE AE EE AE EEE EE EE Ua Ua 0 Val at Veal Oa a Una gt gt GSYOYOSYOlololololeololololfolololfololfolo ol olo alalol aoala Figure 4 9 4 QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot 222 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS Class The Configuration All with available values wi
370. ter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations 255 Buttons he Select the ACL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are NW All The ACE will match all ingress port NW Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE e Frame Ty
371. the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the EAPOL Seen life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports 284 If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode
372. ticast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 183 4 8 2 Profile Table This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams It is allowed to create at maximum 64 Profiles with at maximum 128 corresponding rules for each The Profile Table screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears The page includes the following fields IPMC Profile Configurations Global Profile Mode Disabled IPMC Profile Table Setting Profile Name Profile Description Rule A A Jo Object Global Profile Mode Delete Profile Name Profile Description Rule Figure 4 8 5 IPMC Profile Configuration Page Description Enable Disable the Global IPMC Profile System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is enabled Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the nex
373. tions point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED is an extension of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LLQI Last Listener Query Interval is the maximun response time used to calculate the Maximun Respse Code inserted into Specific Queries It is used to detect the departure of the last listener for a multicast address or source In IGMP this term is called LMQI Last Member Query Interval 418 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which
374. to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 7 TACACS This Page allows you to configure the TACACS Servers The TACACS Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears TACACS Server Configuration Global Configuration seconds minutes Server Configuration Add New Server Figure 4 11 8 TACACS Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Global Configuration These setting are common for all of the TACACS Servers Object Description e Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 1000 to wait for a reply from 303 e Dead Time e Key Server Configuration a TACACS server before it is considered to be dead The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the TACACS server and the switch The table has one row for each TACACS server and a number of columns which are Object e Delete e Hostname e Port e Timeout e Key
375. to previously saved values 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration 321 Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SoH Configuration Model Datel Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 6 Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a modul
376. tomatically E Forced Forced join to Voice VLAN E All means all ports will have one specific setting Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are E Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation E Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation E All means all ports will have one specific setting Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address 250 W LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP NW Both Both OUI and LLDP E All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 17 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 19 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 03 6b Cisco phones D00 0f e2 H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0
377. tons Auto refresh al Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 197 Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 198 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Configuration This Page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCy6 Flooding Enabled WILD Soh Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration Throttling i O i 2 gt 2 3 O Unlimited 2 6 O Unlimited v 7 E ao law o Unlimited w AAA al 23 C Unies p 24 O Unlimited v 25 C Unlimited w 2 z 27 O Unlimited v y Az Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Flooding enabled The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled 199 e MLD SSM Range e Leave Proxy Enable e Proxy Enable e Router Port e Fast Leave e Throtting Buttons Apply Click to apply changes When MLD Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding is
378. tring length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons _Add New User Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears 95 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Security Model Security Name Group Name public default_ro group private default rw group public default_ro group private default rw group default user default rw group Add New Entry Save Reset Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are M v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 M v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c NW usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the
379. trol Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 0xF FFF or Any default value is Any Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment Pv4 frame fragmented option yes nolany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Pv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 238 WE Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP E Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range
380. ts Indicates that the Switch is powered on Blinks Indicates the system is running under booting procedure 10 100 1000Base T interfaces for port to port24 SFP slot LED Color Function Indicates the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed Lights 1000Mbps Blinks Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Off Indicates that the SFP port is link down LNK ACT Indicates the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed Lights 10Mbps or 100Mbps Orange oe l n Blinks Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Off Indicates that the SFP port is link down 10 100 1000Base T interfaces Shared Port1 Port4 LED Color Function Lights Indicates the link through that port is successfully established with 1Gbps Green Off Indicates that the port is link down LNK ACT Indicates the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed Lights Orange 10Mbps or 100Mbps Off Indicates that the port is link down 24 10Base SR LR SFP interfaces for port25 to port28 LED Color Function Indicates the link through that SFP port is successfully established with Green 10Gbps Off Indicates that the SFP port is link down LNK ACT Indicates the link through that SFP port is successfully established with Lights Orange 1Gbps Off Indicates that the SFP port is link
381. ttings contained in the same row means selection of all ports of Managed Switch e Mode Select mirror mode E Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored WE Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Both Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on en A the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only Note Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the releva
382. twork policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an 355 e VLAN ID e L2 Priority e DSCP Port Policies Configuration untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2
383. udes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked i lt El O New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table g ad Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 154 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges
384. uires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follow the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 5 Attach Brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 6 31 SH eg Figure 2 6 Mounting the Managed Switch on a Rack Step6 Proceeds with steps 4 and 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and su
385. ules Buttons Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 137 4 6 6 Prvivate VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Auto refresh LJ Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members A TT eee x 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 tololaofeleloo palo 1 MM HH HH Mm E A MA E MA E HEM A ME HA E MM E AM HE E Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of chec
386. up confi Activate Configuration Figure 4 2 28 Configuration Activate Page Screenshot 81 It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch except for running config which represents the currently active configuration Activate Conf carat Select the file to activate and click This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file 4 2 24 Configuration Delete Configuration Delete page allows to delete the startup config and default config files which stored in FLASH If this is done and the switch is rebooted without a prior Save operation this effectively resets the switch to default configuration Please refer to the Figure 4 2 29 shown below Delete Configuration File Select configuration file to delete Delete Configuration File Figure 4 2 29 Configuration Delete Page Screenshot 4 2 25lmage Select This Page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web Page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images The Image Select screen in Figure 4 2 30 appears In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 1 If the alternate image is active due to a corrupt
387. upports IPv4 and IPv6 multicasting IPMCv4 denotes multicast for IPv4 IPMCv6 denotes multicast for IPv6 IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host L LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX to coexist within a multipoint network LLC header consists of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the sta
388. uration cccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeesaaeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaees 279 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration ccccsccccccssececceseeccescecceseecseueeeseseeeceecesseueeecsuseeessuesessauseesseneeesaaes 280 4 114 Network ACCESS OVSIVISW iia se 291 AVS NEIWWOrK ACCESS OlAlISUCS ue econo 293 AMO RADIUS tl a a T a a 301 AAA TACA o ge ee O 303 ARAU OVENI Wanie oe ee ee 305 AR eee ee nea Mee ese ne reece eer UR Meee ce ee rem errant ee er eee eet 306 A 12 SOC dt dit 314 2121 ROTELIMMIECO Mona iio ii italia iic ello il a 314 A 122 ACCESS Man A EM cs se a eal tiene anaes 318 4 129 ACCESS Management SlalSuCs tia oo ied Schad cheat a le 319 A A E e Ie 321 2 PS eo P O ORO o A ee ee ee eee ee eee 321 A126 POR oe cun iy SAUS fixes iia 322 4121 Fort Securty De tall ists A eae aang Oa eh ec ee 325 12 0 DEC SMOODING xecscvecS al teccestvetelcnc o acted laica 327 4 129 DACP SMOODING SIAUSUCS si ios 329 A221 IP Source ear OM UIT ALO M2 esses dl E 332 AZ 1P Source GuUard otatic Table ici a si bss 333 AA en 334 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table oocccocccccocnccocnncccnnncocncononononnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarinennnnnnans 336 AAS MAG Address Table isisisi eaaa aeaaea eae aa Ea 338 4 13 1 MAC Address Table CONTI ieee nee EEE EAT 338 A132 MAC Address Table Status ii A lata 341 4 1320 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table sia o oa 342
389. urce Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP Address of the entry e MAC Address Source MAC Address Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dy
390. ured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Port Port Description co A Mm E ww AD Bi Peo Pa Ph PSP Pa a Aa LL AL L ae a 2 l ca Ga th Wm co fe ew Mth Aa Ww Bm cS 6S 1Gfdx Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Port Configuration Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Configured Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control Anto 4 a 2 oe oe 3 3 es He a ul Ante Hex a a 3 ro E 3 lt a ul Auto 4 T la lt Y ro 5 ab a T la a o gt ul 2 4 ro 3 ul Y T 3 v a E 3 4 pi w 3 i lt ro o gt 2 lt Y ul ro 3 ul 3 lt o gt o gt a 4 1 v Auto Anto Fiber 106 Auto Fiber 1106 Anto Fiber 105 Anto Fiber 1106 lt 4 un Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Page Screenshot 100 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Port Description e Link Current Link Speed Configured Link Speed e Flow Control e Maximum Frame Size e Excessive Collision Mode Description This is the logical port number for this row means selection all ports of Managed Switch This function provides input per port description and the available letters i
391. ut the module gently through the lever la jalea ajaja SFP Transceiver ot Figure 2 10 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Module Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it to a horizontal position Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 3 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Remote Telnet Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements a Workstations of subscribers running Windows XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 MAC OS X Linux Fedora Ubuntu or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card al Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors e The above Workstation is installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch
392. value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE M Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears E Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE E Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care NW Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP dest
393. ve me multicast A Stream E Multicast Receiver Multicast M O Switch Transmitter le o faa gil Router Receiver Give me multicast q Stream Multicas Receiver D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 179 Multicast Receiver x A Switch 1 Multicast Transmitter a I SO we erver a Switch gt ME c A Switch Multicast Recelver la day Multicast Receiver Figure 4 8 2 Multicast Flooding 180 Multicast Receiver IGMP Snooping Switch Multicast Transmitter Router IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping ieh wi Switch IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query 181 The IGMP Type codes are shown below pe Meaning ott Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present Membership Report version 2
394. w Entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 337 4 13 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Certo Delete vean 10 mac address aeoe pees Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuratio
395. wer Alarm Allows user to choose which power module want to be monitored e Port Alarm Allows user to choose which port want to be monitored Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 74 4 2 17 Faulty Alarm The Faulty Relay Alarm function provides the Power Failure and Port Link Down Broken detection With both power input 1 and power input 2 installed and the check boxes of power 1 power 2 ticked the FAULTY LED indicator will then be possible to light up when any one of the power failures occurs As for the Port Link Down Broken detection the FAULT LED indicator will light up when the port failure occurs certainly the check box beside the port must be ticked first Please refer to the segment of Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact for the failure detection The Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears Fault Alarm Control Configuration L Enable system Log SNMP Trap Port Fail Power Fail pe 1 Cpe 2 O AC Power eS Peeps eos Port Alarm 10 Ge Figure 4 2 20 Windows File Selection Menu Popup The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Allows user to enable Fault Alarm function e Record Allows user to record alarm message to System log syslog or issues out via SNMP Trap or SMTP As default SNMP Trap and SMTP are disabled please enable them first if you want to issue alarm message via them e
396. wise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second 163 Advanced Settings Object Buttons ave Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Description Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will ent
397. work policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric 359 Policy TAG VLAN ID Priority DSCP Auto negotiation Auto negotiation status devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying
398. y information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states E Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows a From initialization switch boot to blocking 156 From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking switch Blocking Listening Disable Leamina Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software
399. y is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP It is Virtual LAN It is a method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags 427 VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS rela
400. y that a client is still present on a port Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds Determines the time between retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses NW Single 802 1X NW Multi 802 1X E MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not So Criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries 282 e Hold Time e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the
401. ynamic mode MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports In Compatible mode MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports The default is Dynamic mode Specify whether the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID The default is Tagged Specify how the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner The default Priority is O Define the maximun time to wait for GMP MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership The value is in units of tenths of a seconds The range is from 0 to 31744 The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one half second When the MVR VLAN is created select the IPMC Profile as the channel filtering condition for the specific MVR VLAN Summary about the Interface Channel Profiling of the MVR VLAN will be shown by clicking the view button Profile selected for designated interface channel is not allowed to have overlapped permit group address The logical port for the settings Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles NW Inactive The designated port does not participate MVR operations 211 NW Source Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports NW Receiver Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data It
402. your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia Private VLAN QCE QCL In a private VLAN PVLANs provide layer 2 isolation between ports within the same broadcast domain Isolated ports configured as part of PVLAN cannot communicate with each other Member ports of a PVLAN can communicate with each other QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class 422 QL
403. ype of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types 1 Ord Bound Clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock 2 P2p Transp Clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock 3 E2e Transp Clock s Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock 4 Master Only Clock s Device Type is Master Only 5 Slave Only Clock s Device Type is Slave Only e Port List Shows the ports configured for that Clock Instance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 6 seconds _Refresh_ Click to refresh the page immediately 388 4 19 Ring ITU T G 8032 Ethernet Ring protection switching ERPS is a link layer protocol applied on Ethernet loop protection to provide sub 50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology ERPS provides a faster redundant recovery than Spanning Tree topology The action is similar to STP or RSTP but the algorithms between them are not the same In the Ring topology every switch should be enabled with Ring function and two ports should be assigned as the member ports in the ERPS Only one switch in the Ring group would be set as the RPL owner switch in which one port called owner port would be blocked and PRL neighbour switch has one port in which one port called neighbour port would be blocked The neighbour port is connected to the owner port directly and this link is called the Ring Protection Link or RPL Each

(NS4750-24S-4T-4X) User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents